lloy201102256k.htm
 
 
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C.20549
 
 
FORM 6-K
 
 
Report of Foreign Private Issuer
Pursuant to Rule 13a-16 or 15d-16
of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934
 
 
25 February 2011
 

 LLOYDS BANKING GROUP plc
 (Translation of registrant's name into English)
 
5th Floor
25 Gresham Street
London
EC2V 7HN
United Kingdom
 
 
(Address of principal executive offices)
 
 
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant files or will file annual reports
under cover Form 20-F or Form 40-F.
 
Form 20-F..X..     Form 40-F.....
 
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant by furnishing the information
contained in this Form is also thereby furnishing the information to the
Commission pursuant to Rule 12g3-2(b) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.
 
Yes .....      No ..X..
 
If "Yes" is marked, indicate below the file number assigned to the registrant in connection with Rule
12g3-2(b): 82- ________
 
 
Index to Exhibits
 
 
Item
 
 
No. 1       Regulatory News Service Announcement, dated 25 February 2011
                re: 2010 Results
 
 
 

 
 

 



2010 Results
News Release

Lloyds Banking Group plc



25 February 2011


 
 
BASIS OF PRESENTATION
 
This report covers the results of Lloyds Banking Group plc (the Company) together with its subsidiaries (the Group) for the year ended 31 December 2010.
 
Statutory basis
Statutory results are set out on pages 106 to 144.  However, a number of factors have had a significant effect on the comparability of the Group’s financial position and results.  As a result, comparison on a statutory basis of the 2010 results with 2009 is of limited benefit.
 
Combined businesses basis
In order to provide more meaningful and relevant comparatives, the results of the Group and divisions are presented on a 'combined businesses' basis.  The key principles adopted in the preparation of the combined businesses basis of reporting are described below.
 
· 
In order to reflect the impact of the acquisition of HBOS, the following adjustments have been made:
 
the 2009 results assume HBOS had been owned throughout the year;
 
the gain on acquisition of HBOS (in 2009) and amortisation of purchased intangible assets have been excluded; and
 
the unwind of acquisition-related fair value adjustments is shown as one line in the combined businesses income statement.
· 
In order to better present the business performance the following items, not related to acquisition accounting, have also been excluded:
 
integration costs;
 
insurance and policyholder interests volatility;
 
the Government Asset Protection Scheme (GAPS) fee paid in 2009;
 
goodwill impairment;
 
the curtailment gain in respect of the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes;
 
the customer goodwill payments provision; and
 
loss on disposal of businesses.
 
Further, to enable a better understanding of the Group's core business trends and outlook, certain income statement and balance sheet information is analysed between core and non-core portfolios.  Non-core portfolios consist of non-relationship assets and liabilities, together with assets and liabilities which are outside the Group's current appetite.  The EU mandated retail business disposal is not included in non-core portfolios.
 
Unless otherwise stated income statement commentaries throughout this document compare the year ended 31 December 2010 to the year ended 31 December 2009, and the balance sheet analysis compares the Group balance sheet as at 31 December 2010 to the Group balance sheet as at 31 December 2009.
 

FORWARD LOOKING STATEMENTS
This announcement contains forward looking statements with respect to the business, strategy and plans of the Lloyds Banking Group, its current goals and expectations relating to its future financial condition and performance. Statements that are not historical facts, including statements about the Group or the Group’s management’s beliefs and expectations, are forward looking statements.  By their nature, forward looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to events and depend on circumstances that will occur in the future.  The Group’s actual future business, strategy, plans and/or results may differ materially from those expressed or implied in these forward looking statements as a result of a variety of risks, uncertainties and other factors, including, without limitation, UK domestic and global economic and business conditions; the ability to derive cost savings and other benefits, as well as the ability to integrate successfully the acquisition of HBOS; the ability to access sufficient funding to meet the Group’s liquidity needs; changes to the Group’s credit ratings; risks concerning borrower or counterparty credit quality; market related trends and developments; changing demographic trends; changes in customer preferences; changes to regulation, accounting standards or taxation, including changes to regulatory capital or liquidity requirements; the policies and actions of governmental or regulatory authorities in the UK, the European Union, or jurisdictions outside the UK, including other European countries and the US; the ability to attract and retain senior management and other employees; requirements or limitations imposed on the Group as a result of HM Treasury’s investment in the Group; the ability to complete satisfactorily the disposal of certain assets as part of the Group’s EU state aid obligations; the extent of any future impairment charges or write-downs caused by depressed asset valuations; exposure to regulatory scrutiny, legal proceedings or complaints, actions of competitors and other factors.  Please refer to the latest Annual Report on Form 20-F filed with the US Securities and Exchange Commission for a discussion of such factors together with examples of forward looking statements.  The forward looking statements contained in this announcement are made as at the date of this announcement, and the Group undertakes no obligation to update any of its forward looking statements.

CONTENTS
 
Page 
Key highlights
Summary of results
Group Chief Executive’s statement
   
Combined businesses information
Combined businesses consolidated income statement
Reconciliation of combined businesses profit (loss) before tax to statutory profit before tax for the year
Combined businesses results by half-year
10 
Combined businesses profit (loss) analysis by division
11 
Half-year profit (loss) analysis by division
11 
Summary consolidated balance sheet
12 
Group Finance Director’s review of financial performance and outlook
13 
Combined businesses segmental analysis
29 
Divisional performance
 
Retail
31 
Wholesale
37 
Wealth and International
45 
Insurance
53 
Group Operations
61 
Central items
62 
   
Additional information on a combined businesses basis
63 
Basis of preparation of combined businesses information
63 
Banking net interest margin
66 
Integration costs and benefits
67 
Impairment charge
68 
Core and non-core business
69 
Volatility arising in insurance businesses
70 
Number of employees (full-time equivalent)
72 
   
Risk management
73 
Risk management approach
74 
Principal risks and uncertainties
75 
   
Statutory information
106 
Primary statements
 
Consolidated income statement
107 
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
108 
Consolidated balance sheet
109 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity
111 
Consolidated cash flow statement
113 
Notes
114 
   
Supplementary information
 
Supplementary European Embedded Value (EEV) disclosures
145 
Contacts
149 


KEY HIGHLIGHTS

‘2010 was an important year for Lloyds Banking Group, marking our return to profitability, and a further reduction in risk in our business.  Our significant progress in the year has positioned the Group well to become the best bank in the UK for all our stakeholders, including our customers, shareholders and employees.’
J Eric Daniels
Group Chief Executive

RETURN TO PROFITABILITY
 
 
·  
The Group returned to profitability on a combined businesses basis with profit before tax of £2,212 million (2009: £6,300 million loss).
 
·  
Statutory profit before tax was £281 million (2009: £1,042 million, including an £11,173 million gain on the acquisition of HBOS); after charging integration costs of £1,653 million and other adjusting net charges of £278 million including a loss on disposal of businesses of £365 million.
 
·  
Loss attributable to equity shareholders was £320 million (2009: profit of £2,827 million); equivalent to a loss per share of 0.5 pence (2009: earnings per share of 7.5 pence), after a charge for taxation of £539 million (2009: credit of £1,911 million) and a charge for profit attributable to non-controlling interests of £62 million (2009: £126 million).

GOOD FRANCHISE MOMENTUM
 
 
·  
Good trading performance against the backdrop of modest growth in UK economy.
 
·  
Continued active support for the UK’s economic recovery by providing £30 billion of gross mortgage lending (including remortgages) and £49 billion of committed gross lending to businesses, of which £11 billion for SMEs.
 
·  
Underlying total income increased by 3 per cent to £23,641 million, including core business income growth of 7 per cent.
 
·  
Banking net interest margin improved to 2.10 per cent (2009: 1.77 per cent) with the majority of the gain achieved in the first half of the year.
 
·  
Significant reduction in the impairment charge. Impairment charge was 45 per cent lower at £13,181 million (2009: £23,988 million).
 
·  
Strong cost performance with a 6 per cent reduction in operating expenses to £10,928 million.  Further improvement in the underlying cost:income ratio to 46.2 per cent (2009: 50.7 per cent).
 
·  
Continued strong progress with the integration programme delivering annual run-rate savings of £1,379 million.  Confident of delivering a run-rate of £2 billion per annum by the end of 2011.

BALANCE SHEET STRENGTHENED; RISK REDUCED
 
·  
Good progress on balance sheet reduction with cumulative non-core asset reduction of £105 billion.  On track to meet target of £200 billion over the next three years.
 
·  
Capital position significantly improved with core tier 1 ratio increased to 10.2 per cent, primarily reflecting a reduction in risk weighted assets by 18 per cent to £406.4 billion.
 
·  
Excellent progress against term funding objectives with £50 billion of wholesale term issuance in the year.
 
·  
Customer relationship deposits increased by 3 per cent reflecting good growth in Retail and in Wealth and International.
 
·  
Reduction in liquidity support from government an*d central bank facilities of £61 billion to £97 billion.

STRONG MEDIUM-TERM PROSPECTS
 
 
·  
Given the flexibility and capacity we have for core business growth, we continue to believe that the Group has strong medium-term prospects, notwithstanding the economic and regulatory headwinds that we face in 2011.
 

SUMMARY OF RESULTS

       
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
Results
     
£m 
 
£m 
 
                 
Statutory
               
Total income, net of insurance claims
     
24,956 
 
23,278 
 
Total operating expenses
     
(13,270)
 
(15,984)
 
17 
Trading surplus
     
11,686 
 
7,294 
 
60 
Impairment
     
(10,952)
 
(16,673)
 
34 
Gain on acquisition
     
– 
 
11,173 
   
Profit before tax
     
281 
 
1,042 
 
(73)
Profit (loss) attributable to equity shareholders
     
(320)
 
2,827 
   
Earnings per share
     
(0.5)p
 
7.5p 
   
                 
Combined businesses basis (note 1, page 63)
               
Total income, net of insurance claims
     
23,444 
 
23,964 
 
(2)
Underlying total income, net of insurance claims1
     
23,641 
 
22,893 
 
Operating expenses2
     
(10,928)
 
(11,609)
 
Trading surplus
     
12,366 
 
12,355 
   
Impairment
     
(13,181)
 
(23,988)
 
45 
Profit (loss) before tax
     
2,212 
 
(6,300)
   
                 
Banking net interest margin
     
2.10% 
 
1.77% 
   
Banking asset margin
     
1.56% 
 
1.11% 
   
Banking liability margin
     
0.97% 
 
1.28% 
   
Cost:income ratio3
     
46.6% 
 
48.4% 
   
Underlying cost:income ratio1, 2, 3
     
46.2% 
 
50.7% 
   
Impairment as a % of average advances
     
2.01% 
 
3.25% 
   
                 
Capital and balance sheet
     
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec  2009 
   
Statutory
               
Loans and advances to customers4
     
£592.6bn 
 
£627.0bn 
 
(5)
Customer deposits5
     
£393.6bn 
 
£406.7bn 
 
(3)
Wholesale funding
     
£298.0bn 
 
£325.5bn 
 
(8)
Loan to deposit ratio6
     
154% 
 
169% 
   
Net assets per ordinary share
     
68p 
 
68p 
 
– 
Risk-weighted assets
     
£406.4bn 
 
£493.3bn 
 
(18)
Core tier 1 capital ratio
     
10.2% 
 
8.1% 
   
Tier 1 capital ratio
     
11.6% 
 
9.6% 
   
Total capital ratio
     
15.2% 
 
12.4% 
   
Leverage ratio
     
17 times 
 
18 times 
   
                 

1
Excluding liability management gains of £423 million (2009: £1,498 million) and a £620 million (2009: £427 million) reduction in the fair value of the equity conversion feature of the Group’s Enhanced Capital Notes.
2
Excluding impairment of tangible fixed assets of £150 million (2009: Nil).
3
Operating expenses divided by total income, net of insurance claims.
4
Includes reverse repurchase agreements of £3.1 billion (31 December 2009: £1.1 billion).
5
Includes repurchase agreements of £11.1 billion (31 December 2009: £35.5 billion).
6
Excludes repurchase agreements of £11.1 billion (31 December 2009: £35.5 billion) and reverse repurchase agreements of £3.1 billion (31 December 2009: £1.1 billion).

GROUP CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STATEMENT

Summary
2010 was a good year for the Group, in which we made significant progress, delivering a strong operating performance, while strengthening the business for the future.

We achieved a step change in our financial performance despite modest economic growth, returning the Group to profitability while absorbing the substantial costs of reducing risk in the business.  While the significant decrease in impairments was a key driver in our return to profitability, we also saw a good performance in the core business where underlying income grew 7 per cent.

We delivered good momentum across our core businesses through the continued development of our customer relationship strategy, attracting new customers to the Group and broadening and deepening our relationships with existing customers.

We also realised substantial cost savings, and we are on track to deliver our target of £2 billion of run-rate cost synergies from the integration of HBOS by the end of 2011.

We made considerable progress during the year in reducing the Group’s risk.  The application of our prudent approach to restructuring of the existing book and our risk standards to all new business is being reflected in the more predictable performance of these portfolios.  We also made good progress in reducing the size of our balance sheet and substantially strengthened both our capital and funding positions.

As a result of the significant progress we have made in 2010, Lloyds Banking Group is now a much stronger business and is well positioned to realise the potential within its franchise.

Results overview
On a combined businesses basis, the Group reported a £2.2 billion profit in 2010, compared to a £6.3 billion loss before tax in 2009.  Underlying income grew by 3 per cent to £23.6 billion, reflecting good underlying income growth of 7 per cent in our core business, partially offset by a reduction of 9 per cent in our non-core business as a result of planned asset reductions.  Operating expenses fell by 6 per cent, resulting in an improvement in our underlying cost:income ratio of 4.5 percentage points to 46.2 per cent.

On a statutory basis, the Group delivered a profit before tax of £0.3 billion in 2010.  This compared to a profit of £1 billion in 2009, which benefited from an £11.2 billion negative goodwill gain associated with the purchase of HBOS.

A significant reduction in the impairment charge
We achieved a significant reduction in the impairment charge, which fell 45 per cent, with the deterioration in some of our International businesses more than offset by a substantial improvement in the rest of the Group, notably in the Wholesale division.

The considerable reductions in the Retail and Wholesale impairment charges reflect the benefit of the actions we have taken over the past two years and our ongoing effective risk management, as well as the slowly improving economic environment.  While we were disappointed by the increases in the International portfolios, these reflect specific economic challenges facing Ireland, and to some degree Australia, which we are managing closely.


GROUP CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STATEMENT (continued)

Good franchise momentum in 2010
We have seen good momentum across our core business franchise in 2010, supported by the extension of our relationship strategy across the Group, in what remain highly competitive markets.

In Retail, our strategy is to develop deep and enduring customer relationships through offering a broad range of products addressing customers’ needs, alongside superior service and advice.  We opened 1.9 million current accounts, and over 5 million new savings accounts, and increased customer deposits by 5 per cent in the year.

In Wholesale, our commitment to supporting our customers through the cycle was equally successful, and we attracted over 100,000 new start-up customers.  Our achievements were recognised in the marketplace by the receipt of a number of awards.

We see strong growth opportunities in Wealth, through deepening relationships with existing Group customers and through the targeted acquisition of new customers.  In 2010, we saw encouraging early results from the development of our customer offerings, and we grew our UK relationship customer base by 12 per cent.

In Insurance our focus on sustainable and profitable growth led to a 13 per cent increase in profit before tax.  While this strategy led to a reduction in overall sales volumes in our UK Life, Pensions and Investments business as we stopped selling a number of low return heritage HBOS products, this resulted in a substantial increase in new business margin.

Supporting the UK’s economic recovery
During 2010 the Group continued to support the UK’s economic recovery through new lending to our mortgage and business customers.  The Group extended £30 billion of gross mortgage lending (including remortgages) to UK homeowners and supported over 50,000 first time buyers.

We also provided £49 billion of committed gross lending to UK businesses in 2010, of which £11 billion was for SMEs.  As part of our SME Charter, the Group has committed to helping 300,000 new start-up businesses by the end of 2012, and has already helped in excess of 100,000 such enterprises during 2010.  We continue to approve over 80 per cent of lending applications from SME customers.  Despite the uncertain economic environment, the Group has successfully grown net lending to its core SME customers by 2.1 per cent, which compares favourably with the industry-wide reduction in SME lending reported in the latest available market statistics.

As a result of our focus, we will exceed the mortgage and business lending commitments made by the Group to the UK government for the year ended 28 February 2011.

We have recently announced, along with four other major UK banks and in the context of an agreement with the UK Government, our intent to help support the UK economic recovery by jointly providing the capacity to support gross new lending of £190 billion to creditworthy UK businesses (including £76 billion to small and medium sized businesses).  We are determined to play a full role in supporting investment by UK businesses and households.

GROUP CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STATEMENT (continued)

Integration programme on track
We continued to make good progress on the integration of Lloyds TSB and HBOS, one of the largest and most complex programmes undertaken in the UK, exiting the year with run-rate cost synergies of £1.4 billion, as expected.  We achieved savings across a wide range of Group activities, including implementing improved processes which are now being used on a harmonised basis across the Group, and driving savings in property and procurement.  As part of the integration, we have also commenced the implementation of a number of major systems changes, which will complete in 2011.

Our progress in 2010 underpins our confidence that we will deliver our target of £2 billion of annual run-rate cost synergies by the end of 2011.

Further progress in balance sheet reductions
We are pleased with the progress we have made in reducing the size of the Group’s balance sheet, with over half of our five year reduction plan achieved in the first two years.  Although this has had an adverse effect on income, it has resulted in a material reduction in the Group’s risk profile, and a smaller balance sheet which brings associated funding benefits.

We have now achieved asset reductions totalling £105 billion in the two years since the inception of the programme, against our target of a £200 billion reduction.

Excellent progress on funding and liquidity
We made excellent progress in enhancing our funding and liquidity position in 2010, thereby further reducing the Group’s risk, albeit at some incremental cost.

We increased our deposit base by 3 per cent, which, together with the reduction in the size of our balance sheet, resulted in an improvement in our loan to deposit ratio to 154 per cent at the end of 2010 from 169 per cent at the 2009 year end.

In addition, we substantially exceeded our guidance for term wholesale funding issuance, achieving £50 billion of issuance in the year.  We also continued to broaden the range of our funding sources, and maintained the proportion of our wholesale funding with a maturity of more than one year at 50 per cent.

Term issuance during the year enabled us to materially reduce the liquidity we receive from government and central bank sources, by £61 billion to £97 billion at the year end and we have made further progress since then.

Capital position further strengthened
We considerably strengthened our capital position in the year, positioning us well ahead of the implementation of the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision’s so called ‘Basel III’ capital reforms, and changes expected to a number of accounting practices.

Our core tier 1 ratio increased to 10.2 per cent, from 8.1 per cent at the end of 2009, substantially in excess of regulatory requirements.  We also restructured the capital within our insurance subsidiaries, which will deliver substantial benefits under the Basel III reforms.  At the year end, our tier 1 ratio was 11.6 per cent, and our total capital ratio was 15.2 per cent.


GROUP CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STATEMENT (continued)

Regulatory environment
We operate in a demanding and evolving regulatory environment, and have continued to engage actively with our regulators during the year on a number of proposed reforms, ensuring we have a strong and stable banking system, which will also be able to support and serve its customers and the wider economy.

Following extensive scrutiny of the Payment Protection Insurance (PPI) market in recent years, the Financial Services Authority issued its final policy statement on PPI complaints handling in August 2010.  The application of this policy, which has been challenged by the British Bankers’ Association in a judicial review, could in extremis have a material effect on the Group’s financial position.

Our people
I am proud of the high levels of support and service our staff have continued to deliver to our customers over the past year, in what remains a challenging environment, and in the context of the considerable changes to the Group arising from the integration.  Their dedication is reflected in our significant achievements in 2010, and the Board and I are very appreciative of their contribution.

Well positioned for future success
It has been a tremendous honour and a privilege to lead our many talented and dedicated people over the last eight years, and I would like to thank my colleagues and the Board for their support over this time.  I am grateful to have been given the opportunity to create the new Group.  The significant progress we have made in 2010 positions the Group well for the future to meet our objective of becoming the best bank for all our stakeholders, including our customers, shareholders and employees.



J Eric Daniels
Group Chief Executive


 



THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

COMBINED BUSINESSES INFORMATION

The analysis and commentary that is set out on pages 8 to 72 is presented on a combined businesses basis.  The basis of preparation of the combined businesses results is set out on page 63.

 
Page 
Combined businesses consolidated income statement
Reconciliation of combined businesses profit (loss) before tax to statutory profit before tax for the year
Combined businesses results by half-year
10 
Combined businesses profit (loss) analysis by division
11 
Half-year profit (loss) analysis by division
11 
Summary consolidated balance sheet
12 
Group Finance Director’s review of financial performance and outlook
13 
Combined businesses segmental analysis
29 
Divisional performance
 
Retail
31 
Wholesale
37 
Wealth and International
45 
Insurance
53 
Group Operations
61 
Central items
62 
Additional information on a combined businesses basis
63 
Basis of preparation of combined businesses information
63 
Banking net interest margin
66 
Integration costs and benefits
67 
Impairment charge
68 
Core and non-core business
69 
Volatility arising in insurance businesses
70 
Number of employees (full-time equivalent)
72 

COMBINED BUSINESSES CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

           
2010 
 
2009 
           
£ million 
 
£ million 
                 
Net interest income
         
13,822 
 
12,726 
Other income
         
10,164 
 
11,875 
Total income
         
23,986 
 
24,601 
Insurance claims
         
(542)
 
(637)
Total income, net of insurance claims
         
23,444 
 
23,964 
Costs:
               
Operating expenses
         
(10,928)
 
(11,609)
Impairment of tangible fixed assets
         
(150)
 
– 
           
(11,078)
 
(11,609)
Trading surplus
         
12,366 
 
12,355 
Impairment
         
(13,181)
 
(23,988)
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
         
(91)
 
(767)
Loss before tax and fair value unwind
         
(906)
 
(12,400)
Fair value unwind
         
3,118 
 
6,100 
Profit (loss) before tax – combined businesses
       
2,212 
 
(6,300)

The basis of preparation of the combined businesses income statement is set out on page 63.


RECONCILIATION OF COMBINED BUSINESSES PROFIT (LOSS) BEFORE TAX TO
STATUTORY PROFIT BEFORE TAX FOR THE YEAR

           
2010 
 
2009 
           
£ million 
 
£ million 
                 
Profit (loss) before tax – combined businesses
     
2,212 
 
(6,300)
Integration costs
         
(1,653)
 
(1,096)
Volatility arising in insurance businesses (note 6, page 70)
     
306 
 
478 
Amortisation of purchased intangibles and goodwill impairment
     
(629)
 
(993)
Pension curtailment gain (note 4, page 122)
         
910 
 
– 
Customer goodwill payments provision
         
(500)
 
– 
Loss on disposal of businesses
         
(365)
 
– 
Government Asset Protection Scheme fee
         
– 
 
(2,500)
Negative goodwill credit
         
– 
 
11,173 
Pre-acquisition results of HBOS plc
         
– 
 
280 
Profit before tax – statutory
         
281 
 
1,042 


COMBINED BUSINESSES RESULTS BY HALF-YEAR

           
2010 
 
2010 
           
First 
half-year 
 
Second 
half-year 
           
£ million 
 
£ million 
                 
Net interest income
         
6,911 
 
6,911 
Other income
         
5,831 
 
4,333 
Total income
         
12,742 
 
11,244 
Insurance claims
         
(261)
 
(281)
Total income, net of insurance claims
         
12,481 
 
10,963 
Costs:
               
Operating expenses
         
(5,435)
 
(5,493)
Impairment of tangible fixed assets
         
(150)
 
– 
           
(5,585)
 
(5,493)
Trading surplus
         
6,896 
 
5,470 
Impairment
         
(6,554)
 
(6,627)
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
         
(62)
 
(29)
Profit (loss) before tax and fair value unwind
         
280 
 
(1,186)
Fair value unwind
         
1,323 
 
1,795 
Profit before tax – combined businesses
         
1,603 
 
609 


COMBINED BUSINESSES PROFIT (LOSS) ANALYSIS BY DIVISION

           
2010 
 
2009 
           
£ million 
 
£ million 
                 
Retail
         
4,716 
 
1,382 
                 
Wholesale
         
3,257 
 
(4,703)
                 
Wealth and International
         
(4,824)
 
(2,356)
                 
Insurance
         
1,102 
 
975 
                 
Group Operations and Central items:
               
Group Operations
         
(63)
 
(149)
Central items
         
(1,976)
 
(1,449)
           
(2,039)
 
(1,598)
Profit (loss) before tax
         
2,212 
 
(6,300)


HALF-YEAR PROFIT (LOSS) ANALYSIS BY DIVISION

           
2010 
 
2010 
           
First 
half-year 
 
Second 
half-year 
           
£ million 
 
£ million 
                 
Retail
         
2,495 
 
2,221 
                 
Wholesale
         
742 
 
2,515 
                 
Wealth and International
         
(1,609)
 
(3,215)
                 
Insurance
         
469 
 
633 
                 
Group Operations and Central items:
               
Group Operations
         
(56)
 
(7)
Central items
         
(438)
 
(1,538)
           
(494)
 
(1,545)
Profit before tax
         
1,603 
 
609 
                 
Banking net interest margin
         
2.08% 
 
2.12% 
Banking asset margin
         
1.55% 
 
1.57% 
Banking liability margin
         
0.98% 
 
0.97% 
Impairment as a % of average advances
         
2.01% 
 
2.02% 

SUMMARY CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET

 
As at 
31 December 
2010 
As at 
31 December 
2009 
Assets
 
£ million 
 
£ million 
         
Cash and balances at central banks
 
38,115 
 
38,994 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
 
156,191 
 
150,011 
Derivative financial instruments
 
50,777 
 
49,928 
Loans and receivables:
       
Loans and advances to customers
 
592,597 
 
626,969 
Loans and advances to banks
 
30,272 
 
35,361 
Debt securities
 
25,735 
 
32,652 
   
648,604 
 
694,982 
Available-for-sale financial assets
 
42,955 
 
46,602 
Held-to-maturity investments
 
7,905 
 
– 
Other assets
 
47,027 
 
46,738 
Total assets
 
991,574 
 
1,027,255 

Liabilities
       
Deposits from banks
 
50,363 
 
82,452 
Customer deposits
 
393,633 
 
406,741 
Trading and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
 
26,762 
 
28,271 
Derivative financial instruments
 
42,158 
 
40,485 
Debt securities in issue
 
228,866 
 
233,502 
Liabilities arising from insurance and investment contracts
 
132,735 
 
123,609 
Subordinated liabilities
 
36,232 
 
34,727 
Other liabilities
 
33,923 
 
33,361 
Total liabilities
 
944,672 
 
983,148 
         
Total equity
 
46,902 
 
44,107 


GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK

2010 performance – a return to profitability and a further reduction in risk
The Group delivered a good operating performance in 2010 against the backdrop of modest growth in the UK economy, with good revenue growth in the core business, an improved net interest margin, a further reduction in costs, and continued strong progress on the integration of HBOS.  The impairment charge reduced significantly, with deterioration in impairments in Ireland more than offset by substantial improvements elsewhere in the Group, particularly in the Wholesale division.  As a result the Group returned to profitability in 2010 on a combined businesses basis, reporting a profit before tax of £2,212 million in 2010, compared to a loss before tax of £6,300 million in 2009.

The increase in profit before tax was primarily generated by Wholesale and Retail.  Wholesale returned to profitability in 2010 delivering profit before tax of  £3,257 million compared to a loss before tax of £4,703 million in 2009 reflecting a significant reduction in the impairment charge.  Retail profit before tax also increased significantly to £4,716 million from £1,382 million in 2009 driven by good income growth and a significantly lower impairment charge.  Insurance delivered a 13 per cent increase in profit before tax to £1,102 million as our focus on improved profitability of the product set delivered higher new business profits, despite lower sales.  However, these increases were partially offset by a significant increase in loss before tax in Wealth and International to £4,824 million from £2,356 million in 2009, driven by a higher impairment charge, predominantly due to the material deterioration of the economic environment in Ireland in the last quarter of 2010.

While the majority of the Group's 2010 profit was earned in the first half, when liability management gains in the first half and losses in the second half arising from the equity conversion feature of the Enhanced Capital Notes (ECNs) are excluded, the second half saw a significant improvement in profitability when compared to the first half, driven by a significant increase in Wholesale profit, partially offset by an increased loss in Wealth and International.

Statutory profit before tax was £281 million in 2010.  While this was a reduction from £1,042 million in 2009, the 2009 result had benefited from an £11,173 million credit from the gain arising on the HBOS acquisition (negative goodwill).  In 2010, statutory profit included a charge for integration costs of £1,653 million (2009: £1,096 million), a provision of £500 million for customer goodwill payments, and a loss on disposal of businesses (acquired from a previous lending relationship) of £365 million; these items were partially offset by a £910 million pension curtailment gain and positive insurance volatility of £306 million.  After a taxation charge of £539 million (see page 26) and a charge for profit attributable to non-controlling interests of £62 million, loss attributable to equity shareholders was £320 million and loss per share amounted to 0.5 pence.

We further reduced risk in the business, through the reduction in the size of the Group’s balance sheet in line with our strategy and through the significant improvements in our capital, funding and liquidity achieved during the year.  Our core tier 1 ratio now stands at 10.2 per cent (2009: 8.1 per cent), and our loan to deposit ratio, excluding repos, improved to 154 per cent, and to 119 per cent in our core business.  Through strong term wholesale funding issuance during the year, which totalled £50 billion, we maintained the maturity profile of the Group’s wholesale funding, with 50 per cent having a maturity of more than one year.  We also made excellent progress in reducing liquidity support from government and central bank facilities, which reduced by £60.6 billion to £96.6 billion.

Outlook – strong medium-term prospects
Given the flexibility and capacity we have for core business growth, we continue to believe that the Group has strong medium-term prospects, notwithstanding the headwinds that we face in 2011.  We give detailed comments on our prospects in the following sections.


GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK (continued)

Our medium-term targets remain unchanged.  However, having joined the Group in January, António Horta-Osório will be appointed Group Chief Executive on 1 March, and will be reviewing the business to further develop the strategy and actions needed to realise its full potential.  He expects to report to the board and subsequently to shareholders on the outcome of his strategic review and his plans at the end of the first half of 2011.

With the Group having returned to profitability in 2010, the risk in the business further reduced, and our improved capital, funding and liquidity positions, we now have a stronger business, which is well positioned for the future.

Note on presentation of results
To enable meaningful comparisons to be made with prior periods, and in line with previous results announcements, the income statement commentaries below are on a combined businesses basis (see ‘basis of presentation’).  Certain commentaries also exclude the unwind of fair value adjustments.

Further, to enable a better understanding of the Group's core business trends and outlook, certain income statement and balance sheet information is analysed between core and non-core portfolios.  Non-core portfolios consist of non-relationship assets and liabilities, and assets and liabilities which are outside the Group's current appetite.  The EU mandated retail business disposal is not included in non-core portfolios.

Combined businesses results summary – income
     
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change
     
£m 
 
£m 
 
%
               
Net interest income
   
13,822 
 
12,726 
 
Other income:
             
    Underlying other income
   
10,361 
 
10,804 
 
(4)
    Liability management gains
   
423 
 
1,498 
   
    Reduction in fair value of equity conversion feature of ECNs
   
(620)
 
(427)
   
     
10,164 
 
11,875 
 
(14)
Total income
   
23,986 
 
24,601 
 
(2)
Insurance claims
   
(542)
 
(637)
   
Total income, net of insurance claims
   
23,444 
 
23,964 
 
(2)

Underlying income
Net interest income
   
13,822 
 
12,726 
 
Underlying other income
   
10,361 
 
10,804 
 
(4)
Insurance claims
   
(542)
 
(637)
   
Underlying income
   
23,641 
 
22,893 
 

Core and non-core income
Core
     
19,371 
 
18,188 
 
Non-core
     
4,270 
 
4,705 
 
(9)
Underlying income
     
23,641 
 
22,893 
 

A good revenue performance
Total income, net of insurance claims, decreased by 2 per cent to £23,444 million, which included a reduction of £1,075 million in gains from the Group's liability management exercises and a £193 million increase in the mark-to-market losses arising from the equity conversion feature of the Group’s Enhanced Capital Notes.  The total mark-to-market loss relating to the ECNs in 2010 was £620 million, and comprised a gain of £192 million in the first half of the year and a loss of £812 million in the second half.

GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK (continued)

Underlying income, excluding these items, increased by 3 per cent.  The Group delivered a good revenue performance in its core business in 2010 despite subdued growth in lending markets.  Core business underlying income growth of 7 per cent was, however, partially offset by a reduction in non-core income of 9 per cent, in line with progress against the Group’s strategy to reduce the size of its balance sheet.

Group net interest income increased by £1,096 million, or 9 per cent, to £13,822 million.  The net interest margin from our banking businesses was 33 basis points higher at 2.10 per cent, as higher asset pricing and reductions in the average spread between base rate and LIBOR more than offset lower deposit margins in Retail and increasing wholesale funding spreads.  The incremental costs of wholesale funding have been recorded within Central items.  The banking asset margin increased by 45 basis points to 1.56 per cent, and the banking liability margin decreased by 31 basis points to 0.97 per cent.

The majority of the net interest margin increase was achieved in the first half of the year, with only modest improvement in the second half, as previously guided, given rising wholesale market funding costs, a slowing migration of mortgages to standard variable rates, continued liability margin pressures, and modest additional costs reflecting the successful increase in term issuance compared to our initial expectations.

In 2011, we see limited scope to increase asset pricing, with any gains likely to be offset by elevated wholesale funding costs, while liability margins will remain under pressure as a result of competitive markets and low base rates.  Given these factors and the margin expansion since 2009, which we have achieved earlier than expected, we do not expect further progression in our net interest margin in 2011 compared to 2010 as a whole.

Other income decreased by 14 per cent to £10,164 million.  Excluding liability management gains and movements in the fair value of the ECNs, underlying other income decreased 4 per cent.  This reflected lower payment protection insurance (PPI) income as a result of the Group’s decision to withdraw from writing PPI business during the year, lower overdraft charges following changes to fee structures, and loss on sale of assets arising from targeted balance sheet reductions, as well as other elements principally related to changes in financial market conditions during the year.

Divisional underlying income performance
           
2010 
         
2009 
 
Change 
   
Core 
£m 
 
Non-core 
£m 
 
Total 
£m 
 
Core 
£m 
 
Non-core 
£m 
 
Total 
£m 
 
Core 
                             
Retail
 
10,394 
 
591 
 
10,985 
 
9,386 
 
388 
 
9,774 
 
11 
Wholesale
 
5,540 
 
3,022 
 
8,562 
 
5,336 
 
3,573 
 
8,909 
 
Wealth & International
 
1,679 
 
657 
 
2,336 
 
1,601 
 
744 
 
2,345 
 
Insurance
 
2,009 
 
– 
 
2,009 
 
1,990 
 
– 
 
1,990 
 
Group Operations and Central items
 
(251)
 
– 
 
(251)
 
(125)
 
 
– 
 
(125)
   
Underlying income
 
19,371 
 
4,270 
 
23,641 
 
18,188 
 
4,705 
 
22,893 
 

Core business income growth was primarily driven by a strong performance in Retail, where net interest income benefited from an increase in asset margins, the majority of which occurred in the first half of the year.  This increase was partially offset however by lower savings margins.  Mortgage margins reflected a continued increase in the proportion of mortgages on standard variable rates (now representing 48 per cent of outstanding balances), lower LIBOR to base rate spreads, and higher new business margins as assets were priced to appropriately reflect


GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK (continued)

risk and changes in funding costs.  The Group achieved a 22.1 per cent share of gross mortgage lending (2009: 24.1 per cent), in markets which remained generally subdued.  Unsecured lending balances were lower, continuing the recent trend and reflecting lower customer demand and continuing customer deleveraging.  During the year, we continued to build our current account and savings customer franchises in what remains a competitive market for customer deposits, and reduced the proportion of more expensive term deposits while maintaining good overall deposit growth of 5 per cent.

In Wholesale, core income grew by 4 per cent, driven by an increase in the banking net interest margin, principally from asset margin growth, which largely reflected the repricing of lending business.  This was partially offset by lower net interest income in Treasury and Trading, reflecting the more stable interest rate environment.  Non-core income decreased by 15 per cent, given lower interest earning asset balances resulting from the excellent progress in targeted balance sheet reductions.

In Wealth and International, core income increased by 5 per cent, driven by the positive effect of foreign exchange movements in the International business and of higher global stock markets in the Wealth businesses, partially offset by a decline in the banking net interest margin.

The present value of new business premiums in our life, pensions and investments businesses decreased by 20 per cent, largely reflecting the focus on improving the profitability of the product set and the withdrawal of certain HBOS legacy products with lower returns.  However, as a result of the repositioning of the product set, the benefits of cost savings and a reduction in initial commission on OEICs in 2010, UK new business profit increased by £135 million to £267 million.  This improved performance shows through the Insurance division’s UK margins on an EEV basis increasing to 3.7 per cent in 2010, compared to 2.6 per cent in 2009.  General Insurance delivered a robust performance after taking account of the impact of the 2010 freeze events and the Group’s decision to cease writing new payment protection business during the year.

Within Group Operations and Central Items, underlying income decreased by £126 million primarily due to a reduction in the fair value of derivatives not mitigated through hedge accounting.  Net interest expense was broadly unchanged at £823 million, but included capital and wholesale liquidity funding costs of £601 million (2009: £260 million) not recovered from the divisions, with the increase primarily due to higher wholesale market funding spreads and the Group's decision to accelerate its wholesale funding in 2010.  These increased costs were offset by improved net interest from interest rate risk management activities.

Outlook – income
Core assets accounted for approximately 82 per cent of income in 2010 (2009: 79 per cent), with core income growing 7 per cent.  In 2011, however, we expect income trends will reflect continued customer deleveraging and subdued new lending demand which, with further non-core asset reductions, will result in a continued reduction in the overall size of the Group’s balance sheet.  As already stated, we do not expect to see further net interest margin progression in 2011.

Over time, however, we continue to target core businesses income growth of between 6 and 7 per cent per year and believe that our margin is likely to return to more than 2.5 per cent in the medium-term (approximately 2014) reflecting the effect of modest further improvements in asset pricing, higher liability margins facilitated by higher base rates, and greater stability in wholesale funding markets.  We also anticipate reducing our wholesale funding requirements over this period.  This margin outlook reflects, inter alia, our core economic assumptions for the medium-term, including base rates increasing to 3.75 per cent by the end of this period and no deterioration in consumer spending, the Group’s asset reduction programme, the assumed costs of refinancing as wholesale funding matures, and a narrowing of wholesale market credit spreads over the medium-term.  At the same time however, it is not possible to predict what effect current regulatory discussions could have on funding costs and therefore margin.

GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK (continued)

Combined businesses results summary – expenses

       
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
       
£m 
 
£m 
 
                 
Operating expenses
     
(10,928)
 
(11,609)
 
Impairment of tangible fixed assets1
     
(150)
 
– 
   
       
(11,078)
 
(11,609)
 
                 
Integration synergies run rate at 31 December
     
1,379 
 
766 
   
Underlying cost:income ratio
     
46.2% 
 
50.7% 
   

1
Further detail is given in note 6, page 123.

Strong cost management delivering benefits
The Group has an excellent track record in managing its cost base, and has delivered a strong cost performance in 2010.  During 2010, operating expenses decreased by 6 per cent to £10,928 million, as substantial integration related savings were captured, together with lower levels of operating lease depreciation.  After investment, ongoing business as usual expenses were held within inflationary levels.  Our underlying cost:income ratio also saw further improvement to 46.2 per cent.

We have already made significant progress in capturing savings from the integration programme with annual run-rate savings totalling £1,379 million achieved as at 31 December 2010.  The Group is on track to deliver a run-rate of £2 billion per annum of cost synergies and other operating efficiencies by the end of 2011.

To date, costs of preparing for the EU mandated disposal of at least 600 UK branches, associated customer assets and liabilities and a proportion of our mortgage assets, have been modest.  However with integration nearing completion, activity preparing for this divestment will accelerate significantly.  The final cost will depend on the buyer and the extent to which substantial IT system and infrastructure development will be necessary.  Therefore the total cost is hard to predict but is likely to be substantial.  These costs will be excluded from combined businesses profits.

With income growth in the short term dependent, inter alia, upon economic conditions, strong cost management will continue to be an important focus for management.

Outlook – expenses
We expect that our costs will be broadly flat in 2011, with further absolute cost savings likely to be partially offset by increased investment proposed to support the growth of the core business, increasing regulatory costs, costs resulting from the introduction of the Bank Levy (which is expected to cost around £260 million in 2011), and the combined cost in the region of £100 million of the recent rise in VAT and employers’ National Insurance contributions.  Excluding the cost of the Bank Levy, the Group continues to target a cost:income ratio of approximately 40 per cent in the medium term.


GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK (continued)

Combined businesses results summary – impairment charge

           
2010 
         
2009 
 
Change 
   
Core 
£m 
 
Non-core 
£m 
 
Total 
£m 
 
Core 
£m 
 
Non-core 
£m 
 
Total 
£m 
 
Core 
Retail
                           
Secured
 
251 
 
41 
 
292 
 
656 
 
133 
 
789 
 
62
Unsecured
 
2,372 
 
83 
 
2,455 
 
3,318 
 
120 
 
3,438 
 
29
   
2,623 
 
124 
 
2,747 
 
3,974 
 
253 
 
4,227 
 
34 
Wholesale
 
1,276 
 
3,170 
 
4,446 
 
2,187 
 
13,496 
 
15,683 
 
42 
Wealth and International
                       
Ireland
 
– 
 
4,264 
 
4,264 
 
– 
 
2,949 
 
2,949 
 
– 
Other
 
221 
 
1,503 
 
1,724 
 
189 
 
940 
 
1,129 
 
(17)
   
221 
 
5,767 
 
5,988 
 
189 
 
3,889 
 
4,078 
 
(17)
Impairment charge
 
4,120 
 
9,061 
 
13,181 
 
6,350 
 
17,638 
 
23,988 
 
35 

Impairment charge significantly lower
The Group achieved a significant reduction in the impairment charge in 2010, in both the core and non-core businesses.  The impairment charge of £13,181 million was 45 per cent lower than the £23,988 million charge in 2009, with deterioration in Ireland more than offset by substantial improvements elsewhere in the Group, particularly in the Wholesale division.

Impaired loans increased by 10 per cent to £64,606 million, representing 10.3 per cent of closing advances, driven by an increase in impaired loans in International, partially offset by decreases in Retail and Wholesale facilitated by improving economic conditions and, in Wholesale, also as a result of write-offs of irrecoverable assets and the sale of previously impaired assets.  The Group’s coverage ratio increased by 1.7 per cent to 45.9 per cent, primarily as a result of an increase in provisions in International, predominantly in Ireland.  Non-core loans and advances to customers generated approximately 70 per cent of the Group's impaired loans reflecting their higher risk profile, with a coverage ratio of around 50 per cent at 31 December 2010.  The coverage ratio of the Group's impaired core loans and advances to customers was approximately 37 per cent.

In Retail, the improvement in credit performance was faster than expected a year ago, with the impairment charge as a percentage of average loans and advances to customers decreasing to 0.74 per cent in 2010, significantly lower than 1.11 per cent in 2009.  The core business impairment charge decreased by 34 per cent, reflecting the improved quality of new business and effective portfolio management and the continuing slow recovery of the economy.

The lower secured impairment charge reflected reduced impaired loan levels and improved arrears in the first half of 2010, although in the second half, and particularly in the last quarter, we saw some signs of strain, with fewer customers returning their accounts to order than was the case six months ago.  House prices fell slightly in the year and the proportion of the mortgage portfolio with an indexed loan-to-value of greater than 100 per cent was broadly stable at 13 per cent.  The value of the portfolio with an indexed loan-to-value greater than 100 per cent and more than three months in arrears has increased slightly by £0.2 billion and is now £3.2 billion, representing 0.9 per cent of the portfolio.  The number of mortgage customers new to arrears has also remained relatively stable in the last twelve months, and is now well below the peak experienced in the second half of 2008.  However, as a result of the early signs of strain we saw in the second half of the year and the subdued economic environment, we expect to see an increase in the secured impairment charge in 2011.

GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK (continued)

The unsecured impairment charge decreased by 29 per cent, reflecting continued improving portfolio trends resulting from the Group’s prudent risk appetite, management actions taken over the past two years, and stable unemployment.  Unsecured impaired loans decreased by £0.8 billion to £3.0 billion as a result of fewer cases going into arrears, improved quality of new business and increased write off of impaired loans.  Impairment provisions as a percentage of impaired loans decreased to 50.6 per cent from 55.3 per cent, driven largely by relatively highly provided assets being written off combined with more stringent criteria for unsecured collections repayment plans.

The Wholesale impairment charge fell significantly from £15,683 million in 2009 to £4,446 million in 2010.  There was a significant reduction in both the core and non-core businesses impairment charge.  The impairment charge as a percentage of average loans and advances to customers improved significantly to 2.08 per cent in 2010 compared to 5.92 per cent in 2009.

The decrease in this period generally reflects the significant actions which were taken in the first half of 2009 on the heritage HBOS portfolios (including the identification of large impairments post the HBOS acquisition, especially in corporate real estate, real estate related and Corporate (UK and US) portfolios), together with the stabilising UK and US economic environment in 2010, a low interest rate environment helping to maintain defaults at a lower level and a number of write backs due to asset disposals.

In Wealth and International, impairment charges totalled £5,988 million, up 47 per cent on £4,078 million in 2009, reflecting increasing impairment charges in corporate and real estate in Ireland and Australia.  The majority of the increase was in the non-core portfolio.  The level of losses continues to be dominated by the economic environment in Ireland, and to a lesser extent has also been influenced by the performance of specific areas of the Australian economy.

After the release of the Interim Management Statement on 2 November 2010, the Group saw a further significant deterioration in market conditions in Ireland, with concerns over the country’s fiscal position leading ultimately to the approval of its application for EU-IMF financial support on 21 November 2010.  Market sentiment continued to be negatively affected by uncertainty about the political situation and about the economic effect of the austerity measures introduced in the Irish Budget of 7 December 2010.  As a result, in a statement dated 17 December 2010, we noted that any economic recovery in Ireland may take longer to achieve, that asset prices will remain depressed for longer than previously anticipated and therefore that we believed that the significant deterioration in the Irish market would affect the timing and level of value realisation from this portfolio.

At the year end, compared to 30 June 2010, given the deterioration in market conditions noted above, a further approximately 10 per cent of the £27 billion Irish portfolio had become impaired, and we have increased the level of provisions against the portfolio, increasing the impairment charge relating to Irish exposures for the full year 2010 to £4.3 billion on a combined businesses basis.  This has resulted in an increase in provisions as a percentage of impaired Irish loans to 53.7 per cent at the 2010 year end, in line with our expectations in our statement of 17 December 2010.

In Australia, although economic performance has been robust overall, there are significant geographical and sector variations, and property assets situated outside the principal metropolitan areas have been particularly weak.  Our exposure to these areas within our Australian portfolio drove increased impairments in 2010.

GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK (continued)

Outlook – impairment
Overall, and based on our current economic assumptions for the UK and Ireland, including unemployment and property valuations, we expect to see further reductions in impairment losses in 2011 and beyond.  We continue to target an improvement in the overall Group impairment charge as a percentage of average loans and advances to customers towards an expected 50-60 basis points by around 2014, as economic conditions improve.

In Retail, given our expectations for a modest improvement in the UK economic environment, and a further 2 per cent reduction in house prices in 2011, we currently expect that there will be a modest reduction in the overall Retail impairment charge in 2011.  The rate of improvement is, however, expected to be significantly slower than in 2010, with the improving performance of the unsecured book more than offsetting additional secured charges.

In Wholesale, depending upon UK economic conditions, notably consumer spending, future commercial real estate price stability, the continuation of low interest rates, and the performance of individually large exposures, we would expect to see a further modest reduction in 2011 as a whole, although the timing of the trend is inherently hard to predict.  As previously guided, we expect the overall net impairment charge in our traditional lending businesses (especially in the trading and manufacturing sectors) to increase in 2011, driven in part by lower write backs on asset disposals compared to 2010 and the effect of the UK government austerity measures on the wider economy.  However, we also expect our impairment charges in corporate real estate and real estate related sectors to be lower than 2010 as a result of a continuing stabilisation of the existing portfolio.  We remain vigilant in monitoring changes in economic conditions and to individual lending positions and we continue to invest heavily in expert resource to work with customers to restructure their businesses on to sustainable bases, thus protecting employment where possible.

Despite the worsening trend during 2010, we expect to see a reduction in the Wealth and International impairment charge in 2011, although we anticipate that conditions will remain difficult, and we will therefore continue to monitor international markets closely.

 
GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK (continued)

Capital resources

   
2010 
 
2009 
         
Risk-weighted assets
 
£406.4bn 
 
£493.3bn 
Core tier 1 ratio
 
10.2% 
 
8.1% 
Tier 1 capital ratio
 
11.6% 
 
9.6% 
Total capital ratio
 
15.2% 
 
12.4% 

Strong capital ratios
Our capital ratios improved significantly during the year, primarily reflecting a reduction in risk weighted assets, and balance sheet liability management transactions.  Total capital also increased through further subordinated debt issuance and through a repatriation of capital held within our insurance subsidiaries, although this increase was partially reduced by a revised approach to private equity investments which have now been deducted from total capital.

Risk weighted assets reduced by 18 per cent to £406.4 billion, driven by strong management of risk, reduced asset levels and tighter risk criteria for new business.  Reductions were also achieved through changes to our credit risk measurement methodology in certain portfolios, including migrating a number of our Wholesale portfolios, which had previously been modelled on an Advanced Internal Ratings Based Approach, to the Foundation Internal Ratings Based Approach (FIRB), which will facilitate integration work.

Effects of Basel III on capital
During 2010 the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision has substantially refined the details of the so called ‘Basel III’ reforms for an enhanced global capital accord.  These include increased minimum levels of, and quality standards for, capital, increased risk weighting of assets, and the introduction of a minimum leverage ratio, as well as the timing and transitional arrangements for implementation.  The final details are still to be clarified, particularly as the reforms are implemented within the European and UK regulations, which may include a countercyclical buffer, requiring higher levels of capital to be held at certain points of the economic cycle, and higher capital requirements for systemically important financial institutions.

One of the key reforms impacting the Group arises from a revised treatment of the capital held within our insurance subsidiaries. During 2010, following a strategic review of our capital structure, £0.8 billion of equity was exchanged for subordinated debt within the insurance group and £1.5 billion was repatriated from the insurance group.  Whilst this has no overall effect on the Group’s core tier 1 capital under current Basel regulations, it does deliver a material core tier 1 capital benefit under the proposed Basel III reforms.

Outlook – capital resources
The effect of the Basel III reforms is uncertain as much will depend on business performance and mitigating actions that can be completed, even before the transition period comes in to effect.  Analysis suggests that with no mitigating actions the reforms will reduce the Group’s core tier 1 ratio by approximately 1.2 per cent in 2013, although lower risk weighted assets are expected from the planned reduction in the non-core balance sheet.  The additional impact in 2014 of deducting the equity investment in insurance in excess of 10 per cent, transitioning in at 20 per cent per annum from 1 January 2014, would be around 0.3 per cent were the Group to take no further action to mitigate this.  The Group is confident that it is well positioned to maintain a strong capital position, meeting all regulatory requirements as currently formulated.

Based on our economic outlook, we continue to target returns on equity of more than 15 per cent over the medium to longer term.  However, there continue to be material uncertainties as to future capital requirements and therefore we cannot be more specific at this stage.

GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK (continued)

Balance sheet

   
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
   
£bn 
 
£bn 
         
Funded assets1
 
655.0 
 
715.1 
Non-core assets2
 
194.7 
 
236.1 

1
Further analysis is set out on page 79.
2
Further analysis is set out on page 70.

Rightsizing the balance sheet
Total Group funded assets decreased to £655.0 billion from £715.1 billion at 31 December 2009, substantially driven by reductions in non-core lending portfolios across the three banking divisions, continued customer deleveraging and de-risking and subdued demand in lending markets.  We are pleased with the progress made on our balance sheet reduction plans in the period, given challenging market conditions, particularly in the latter part of 2010.

Previously, we set out our strategy to reduce non-core assets, including non-relationship assets and businesses which are outside our current appetite, by some £200 billion from a non-relationship pool of £300 billion.  It continues to be our intention to manage these assets for value and, given the current economic climate, our primary focus remains on running these assets down over time.  This strategy has been very effective and so far reductions of £105 billion have been achieved.

Outlook – balance sheet
We are confident of achieving our targeted further reductions in non-core assets of approximately £100 billion over the next three years.  In addition, we continue to progress plans to execute the divestment of retail assets and liabilities in line with our state aid obligations.

The balance sheet reduction over time is providing the Group with increased optionality and flexibility from the resultant releases in both funding and capital.  Together with initiatives to increase customer deposits in line with market growth, we expect to reduce the proportion of the Group’s funding that is derived from wholesale markets and eliminate our use of government and central bank facilities by the end of 2012.  This will provide capacity for core business growth in line with our relationship strategy. In 2011, however, we expect to see a continuation in the trend of customer deleveraging and generally subdued demand for new lending.


GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK (continued)

Liquidity and funding

   
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
         
Wholesale funding
 
£298.0bn 
 
£325.5bn 
Loan to deposit ratio1
 
154% 
 
169% 
Core business loan to deposit ratio1
 
119% 
 
128% 
Government and central bank funding
 
£96.6bn 
 
£157.2bn 
Proportion of wholesale funding with maturity of greater than one year
 
50% 
 
50% 

1
Excluding repos and reverse repos.

A strengthened liquidity and funding position
The Group made excellent progress against its funding objectives in 2010 and further enhanced its liquidity position which is supported by a robust and stable customer deposit base.  While total customer deposits fell 3 per cent, deposits excluding repurchase agreements increased by 3 per cent, reflecting good growth in relationship deposits in Retail and in Wealth and International.

The Group has continued to reduce its reliance on short-term wholesale funding.  During the year the absolute level of Group wholesale funding fell to £298.0 billion, from £325.5 billion at the end of 2009, reflecting a reduction in balance sheet assets.  By the end of 2010, our loan to deposit ratio, excluding repos and reverse repos, had improved to 154 per cent.  Strong term issuance in 2010 also allowed the Group to maintain its maturity profile of wholesale funding with 50 per cent of wholesale funding having a maturity date greater than one year at 31 December 2010.

As previously guided, over the next couple of years the Group expects its public capital and senior funding issuance to be £20 billion to £25 billion per annum.  We made excellent progress in 2010 on our term funding issuance plans, achieving £30 billion of publicly placed term issuance in the year.  In addition, the Group issued a further £20 billion of term funding during the year via a series of privately placed funding transactions, a level which we do not expect to repeat in 2011.  The Group continues to benefit from a diversity of funding sources.  For example, during the year, we established a new funding programme in the US with our SEC Registered Shelf, issued inaugural Japanese Yen Samurai, Swiss Franc and Canadian Dollar bonds, and publicly launched the Lloyds TSB Bank plc Covered Bond Programme.  We continue to look for opportunities to diversify our funding sources.

We welcome the proposals on minimum standards for funding and liquidity published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision in December 2010.  The introduction of the Liquidity Coverage Ratio and Net Stable Funding Ratio will raise the resilience of banks to potential liquidity shocks and provide the basis for a harmonised approach to liquidity risk management.  These proposals are subject to ongoing refinement and have not yet been enacted into UK and European law.  However, the Group monitors compliance against these internal metrics, and as at 31 December 2010, the Group's Liquidity Coverage Ratio was estimated at 71 per cent and the Net Stable Funding Ratio at 88 per cent.  The actions already in place to reduce the size of the balance sheet are expected to ensure compliance with the future minimum standards, which are expected to be 100 per cent for both ratios, by their respective effective dates.


GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK (continued)

The Group made excellent progress on reducing its liquidity support from governmental and central bank sources, achieving reductions of £60.6 billion in 2010 leaving £96.6 billion outstanding at the year end.  The Group currently receives no liquidity support from either the US Federal Reserve or the European Central Bank.  The drawings from the UK Special Liquidity Scheme facilities and the issuance under the UK Credit Guarantee Scheme have various maturity dates, the last of which is in the fourth quarter of 2012.  The Group is confident that all maturities can be met, and a further £13 billion of government and central bank facilities have been repaid since the year end.

Outlook – liquidity and funding
We expect the combination of continued increases in customer deposits and reductions in assets (primarily from non-core asset reduction plans) over the next three years to deliver further improvements in the Group’s liquidity and funding position.  As a consequence, we expect steady improvement in the overall loan to deposit ratio (which is expected to fall to below 140 per cent within three years), a reduction in wholesale funding requirements and therefore levels of ongoing term issuance, and liquidity levels to be maintained in excess of regulatory requirements.

GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK (continued)

Reconciliation of combined businesses results to statutory results

           
2010 
 
2009 
           
£ million 
 
£ million 
                 
Profit (loss) before tax – combined businesses
     
2,212 
 
(6,300)
Integration costs
         
(1,653)
 
(1,096)
Volatility arising in insurance businesses
     
306 
 
478 
Amortisation of purchased intangibles and goodwill impairment
     
(629)
 
(993)
Pension curtailment gain
         
910 
 
– 
Customer goodwill payments provision
         
(500)
 
– 
Loss on disposal of businesses
         
(365)
 
– 
Government Asset Protection Scheme fee
         
– 
 
(2,500)
Negative goodwill credit
         
– 
 
11,173 
Pre-acquisition results of HBOS plc
         
– 
 
280 
Profit before tax – statutory
         
281 
 
1,042 
Taxation
         
(539)
 
1,911 
Profit (loss) for the year
         
(258)
 
2,953 
Earnings per share
         
(0.5)p
 
7.5p 

Integration costs
One-off integration costs of £1,653 million were incurred in 2010, bringing the total integration costs since the HBOS acquisition to £2,749 million.  The integration costs relate to severance, IT and business costs of implementation.

Volatility arising in insurance businesses
A large proportion of the funds held by the Group’s insurance businesses are invested in assets which are expected to be held on a long-term basis and which are inherently subject to short-term investment market fluctuations.  Whilst it is expected that these investments will provide enhanced returns over the longer term, the short-term effect of investment market volatility can be significant.  In 2010, higher equity market returns compared to our long-term assumptions have contributed to positive insurance and policyholder volatility totalling £306 million.

Pension curtailment gain
A net curtailment gain of £910 million was recognised in 2010 following changes to the Group's UK defined benefit pension schemes.  In the first half of 2010 the Group implemented changes to the terms of its UK defined benefit pension schemes.  As a result of these changes, the amount of any future salary increases that will be deemed pensionable will be capped each year at the lower of Retail Price Index inflation; each employee’s actual percentage increase in pay; and 2 per cent of pensionable pay.  This resulted in a curtailment gain of £1,019 million, but was partially offset in the second half of 2010 from a change in the commutation factors in certain defined benefit schemes.

GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK (continued)

Customer goodwill payments provision
On 21 February, 2011, we announced that we had reached a voluntary agreement with the Financial Services Authority (FSA) to initiate a customer review and contact programme regarding outstanding concerns relating to the variation of limits on some Retail mortgage contracts.  These specifically related to some Halifax standard variable rate mortgage customers, where the wording in the mortgage offer documents received by these customers had the potential to cause confusion.  Under the contact programme, goodwill payments will be made to affected customers.

We have made a customer goodwill payments provision in 2010 of £500 million in relation to the contact programme.  This provision, which has been excluded from combined businesses profits, is expected to fully cover the costs of the programme. Further detail is given in note 26 on page 144.

Loss on disposal of businesses
During 2010, the Group recorded a loss of £365 million on the disposal of two wholly-owned subsidiary companies, acquired from a previous lending relationship, each of which owned an oil drilling rig under construction.  Consistent with the Group’s previous treatment, this loss has been reported outside of the Group’s combined businesses results.

Taxation
The tax charge for the year to 31 December 2010 was £539 million.  This reflects a higher effective tax rate than the UK statutory rate primarily due to the effect of partially unrelieved losses in Ireland and Australia, policyholder tax, and the effect on deferred tax of the reduction in the UK corporation tax rate from 28 per cent to 27 per cent with effect from 1 April 2011.

Acquisition related balance sheet adjustments
Profit before tax includes the unwind of £3,118 million of acquisition related fair value adjustments, of which £2,229 million relates to impairments.  This is ahead of our previous expectation of approximately £2,500 million due to the acceleration of amounts held against the Group's securities portfolios as expectations of future credit losses have improved.  In 2011, we expect a further benefit of some £2 billion broadly in line with previous guidance.  Thereafter, over the medium term, declining annual benefits are expected to accrue.

Legal and regulatory
There has been extensive scrutiny of the Payment Protection Insurance market in recent years, and the Financial Services Authority issued its final Policy Statement on PPI complaints handling in August 2010.  The application of this Policy Statement could in extremis have a material impact on the Group's financial position.  In October 2010, an application for judicial review was issued by the British Bankers’ Association challenging the FSA's new standards for PPI complaints handling and the Financial Ombudsman Service’s approach to such complaints.  The hearing was held in late January 2011, and the judgement (which may be subject to appeal) is expected shortly.  Further detail is given in note 23 on page 137.

The UK Government has appointed an Independent Commission on Banking (ICB) to review structural measures to reform the banking system and promote stability and competition.  The ICB is not expected to publish its final report until September 2011 and it is too early to quantify any possible effect on the Group.

Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) costs in respect of certain investment company failures have now started to emerge and, although relevant costs cannot be predicted, we expect that during the course of 2011 the Group will be required to make contributions towards such costs as required by the FSCS.

GROUP FINANCE DIRECTOR’S REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND OUTLOOK (continued)

Lending to homeowners and businesses
The Group continues to actively support the UK economy by lending to UK households and businesses.  In 2010, we have extended £30 billion of gross mortgage lending (including remortgages) and £49 billion of committed gross lending to businesses, of which £11 billion was for SMEs.

Under the terms of our lending commitments to the UK Government, we agreed to make available gross new lending of £67 billion in the 12 months to 28 February 2011, of which £23 billion would be extended to homeowners and £44 billion to UK businesses.  In the ten months from 1 March to 31 December 2010, we have extended lending that qualifies under the programme totalling over £20 billion to UK homeowners and over £42 billion to UK businesses, of which £10 billion has been extended to SMEs and we are on track to meet our lending commitments in full.

Bank of Scotland (Ireland) Limited
In February 2010, we announced that we would close our retail and intermediary business in the Republic of Ireland, and in August 2010 we announced that we would transfer, subject to the necessary approvals, the Bank of Scotland (Ireland) Limited (BOSI) business to Bank of Scotland plc.  The business was transferred to Bank of Scotland plc on 31 December 2010, including all of the strategic management and decision making activities, at which point BOSI ceased to exist.  As a result the Group no longer has any regulated banking business in the Republic of Ireland.  Bank of Scotland plc will utilise its extensive operational and management capability, including general and credit management, oversight and control, within the UK in relation to the Irish portfolio, aiding the efficient run-down of the existing lending portfolio.

UK economic outlook
We continue to believe that a slow recovery over the next couple of years remains the most likely outcome for the UK economy.  Our central planning scenario reflects a number of economic assumptions including that GDP growth will recover to approximately 1.9 per cent in 2011 with a further increase to 2.4 per cent in 2012.  We expect a decrease of 2 per cent in UK house prices in 2011, with a 2 per cent increase in 2012.  We also expect a decrease of 2 per cent in commercial property prices in 2011 and a recovery of 3 per cent in 2012.  Finally, we believe that unemployment will peak at 8.1 per cent in 2011.

Outlook – strong medium-term prospects
Given the flexibility and capacity we have for core business growth, we continue to believe that the Group has strong medium-term prospects, notwithstanding the headwinds that we face in 2011.

Our medium-term targets remain unchanged.  However, having joined the Group in January, António Horta-Osório will be appointed Group Chief Executive on 1 March, and will be reviewing the business to further develop the strategy and actions needed to realise its full potential.  He expects to report to the board and subsequently to shareholders on the outcome of his strategic review and his plans at the end of the first half of 2011.

With the Group having returned to profitability in 2010, the risk in the business further reduced, and our improved capital, funding and liquidity positions, we now have a stronger business, which is well positioned for the future.



Tim Tookey
Group Finance Director


 


THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

COMBINED BUSINESSES SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS

 
Retail 
 
Wholesale 
 
Wealth 
and Int’l 
 
Insurance 
Group 
Operations 
and 
Central  items 
Group 
2010
£m 
 
£m
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
                       
Net interest income
9,378 
 
4,426 
 
1,176 
 
(263)
 
(895)
 
13,822 
Other income
1,607 
 
4,136 
 
1,160 
 
2,814 
 
447 
 
10,164 
Total income
10,985 
 
8,562 
 
2,336 
 
2,551 
 
(448)
 
23,986 
Insurance claims
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(542)
 
– 
 
(542)
Total income, net of insurance claims
10,985 
 
8,562 
 
2,336 
 
2,009 
 
(448)
 
23,444 
Costs:
                     
Operating expenses
(4,644)
 
(3,744)
 
(1,536)
 
(854)
 
(150)
 
(10,928)
Impairment of tangible fixed assets
– 
 
(150)
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(150)
 
(4,644)
 
(3,894)
 
(1,536)
 
(854)
 
(150)
 
(11,078)
Trading surplus
6,341 
 
4,668 
 
800 
 
1,155 
 
(598)
 
12,366 
Impairment
(2,747)
 
(4,446)
 
(5,988)
 
– 
 
– 
 
(13,181)
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
17 
 
(95)
 
(8)
 
(10)
 
 
(91)
Profit (loss) before tax and fair value unwind
3,611 
 
127 
 
(5,196)
 
1,145 
 
(593)
 
(906)
Fair value unwind1
1,105 
 
3,130 
 
372 
 
(43)
 
(1,446)
 
3,118 
Profit (loss) before tax
4,716 
 
3,257 
 
(4,824)
 
1,102 
 
(2,039)
 
2,212 
                       
                       
Banking net interest margin2
2.46% 
 
1.88% 
 
1.63% 
         
2.10% 
Cost:income ratio3
42.3% 
 
43.7%
 
65.8% 
 
42.5% 
   
46.6% 
Impairment as a % of
average advances4
0.74% 
 
2.08% 
 
8.90% 
         
2.01% 
                       
Key balance sheet and other items as at 31 December 2010
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
                       
Loans and advances to customers
363.7 
 
173.2 
 
55.3 
     
0.4 
 
592.6 
Customer deposits
235.6 
 
124.3 
 
32.8 
     
0.9 
 
393.6 
Risk-weighted assets
109.3 
 
222.7 
 
58.7 
     
15.7 
 
406.4 

1
The net credit in 2010 of £3,118 million is mainly attributable to a reduction in the impairment charge of £2,229 million as losses reflected in the acquisition balance sheet valuations of the lending and securities portfolios have been incurred.  There has also been a credit to other income of £1,263 million mainly reflecting the sale of debt securities from the heritage HBOS portfolios during the year.  This has been partly offset by a charge to net interest income of £301 million.  The impact of the fair value unwind on net interest income is lower than in 2009 because the liability management exercises undertaken by the Group have had the effect of crystallising a proportion of the gains reflected in the opening balance sheet valuation of HBOS’s own debt; there has also been a benefit from revised expectations of future impairment losses.
2
The calculation basis for banking net interest margins is set out in note 2 on page 66.
3
Operating expenses divided by total income net of insurance claims.
4
Impairment on loans and advances to customers divided by average loans and advances to customers, excluding reverse repo transactions, gross of allowance for impairment losses.

COMBINED BUSINESSES SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS (continued)
 
Retail 
 
Wholesale 
 
Wealth 
and Int’l 
 
Insurance 
Group  Operations  and 
Central 
items 
 
Group 
2009
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
                       
Net interest income
7,970 
 
4,710 
 
1,217 
 
(287)
 
(884)
 
12,726 
Other income
1,804 
 
4,199 
 
1,128 
 
2,944 
 
1,800 
 
11,875 
Total income
9,774 
 
8,909 
 
2,345 
 
2,657 
 
916 
 
24,601 
Insurance claims
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(637)
 
– 
 
(637)
Total income, net of insurance claims
9,774 
 
8,909 
 
2,345 
 
2,020 
 
916 
 
23,964 
Operating expenses
(4,566)
 
(4,106)
 
(1,544)
 
(974)
 
(419)
 
(11,609)
Trading surplus
5,208 
 
4,803 
 
801 
 
1,046 
 
497 
 
12,355 
Impairment
(4,227)
 
(15,683)
 
(4,078)
 
– 
 
– 
 
(23,988)
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
(6)
 
(720)
 
(21)
 
(22)
 
 
(767)
Profit (loss) before tax and fair value unwind
975 
 
(11,600)
 
(3,298)
 
1,024 
 
499 
 
(12,400)
Fair value unwind
407 
 
6,897 
 
942 
 
(49)
 
(2,097)
 
6,100 
Profit (loss) before tax
1,382 
 
(4,703)
 
(2,356)
 
975 
 
(1,598)
 
(6,300)
                       
                       
Banking net interest margin
1.97% 
 
1.52% 
 
1.71% 
         
1.77% 
Cost:income ratio
46.7% 
 
46.1% 
 
65.8% 
 
48.2% 
 
48.4% 
Impairment as a % of
average advances
1.11% 
 
5.92% 
 
6.04% 
         
3.25% 
                       
                       
Key balance sheet and
other items
As at 31 December 2009
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
                       
Loans and advances to customers
371.1 
 
191.8 
 
63.5 
     
0.6 
 
627.0 
Customer deposits
224.1 
 
153.4 
 
29.0 
   
0.2 
 
406.7 
Risk-weighted assets
128.6 
 
286.0 
 
63.2 
     
15.5 
 
493.3 


DIVISIONAL PERFORMANCE

RETAIL

   
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Net interest income
 
9,378 
 
7,970 
 
18
Other income
 
1,607 
 
1,804 
 
(11)
Total income
 
10,985 
 
9,774 
 
12
Operating expenses
 
(4,644)
 
(4,566)
 
(2)
Trading surplus
 
6,341 
 
5,208 
 
22
Impairment
 
(2,747)
 
(4,227)
 
35 
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
 
17 
 
(6)
   
Profit before tax and fair value unwind
 
3,611 
 
975 
   
Fair value unwind
 
1,105 
 
407 
   
Profit before tax
 
4,716 
 
1,382 
   
             
Banking net interest margin
 
2.46% 
 
1.97% 
   
Banking asset margin
 
1.93% 
 
1.18% 
   
Banking liability margin
 
0.87% 
 
1.41% 
   
Cost:income ratio
 
42.3% 
 
46.7% 
   
Impairment as a % of average advances
 
0.74% 
 
1.11% 
   
             
   
As at  31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at  31 Dec 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
             
Loans and advances to customers
           
Secured
 
337.3 
 
341.1 
 
(1)
Unsecured
 
26.4 
 
30.0 
 
(12)
   
363.7 
 
371.1 
 
(2)
Customer deposits
           
Savings
 
195.3 
 
185.6 
 
Current accounts
 
40.3 
 
38.5 
 
   
235.6 
 
224.1 
 
Risk-weighted assets
 
109.3 
 
128.6 
 
(15)


RETAIL (continued)

Key highlights
 
·
Profit before tax increased to £4,716 million, compared to £1,382 million in 2009.
 
·
Profit before tax and fair value unwind increased to £3,611 million, a strong increase of £2,636 million compared to 2009, driven by good income growth, tight cost control and a significantly lower impairment charge.
 
· 
Net interest income increased by £1,408 million or 18 per cent to £9,378 million, largely as a result of the continuing re-pricing of risk, mortgage customers moving onto standard variable rates and a decrease in the LIBOR to Base Rate spread.
 
·
Other income decreased by £197 million or 11 per cent to £1,607 million, relating particularly to changes to current account overdraft structures.
 
·
Operating expenses remain tightly controlled, increasing by only 2 per cent to £4,644 million, which combined with strong income growth led to a significant reduction in the cost:income ratio to 42.3 per cent. Operating expenses benefited from continuing cost control as well as cost synergies.
 
·
The impairment charge reduced significantly to £2,747 million, down by 35 per cent, supported by prudent risk management, a stabilising economy, broadly stable house prices and low interest rates.  The improvement in credit performance was faster than expected a year ago.
 
·
Loans and advances to customers decreased by £7.4 billion, or 2 per cent to £363.7 billion, as customers continued to reduce their personal indebtedness, particularly unsecured debt.  While mortgage balances declined by £3.8 billion, Retail continued to support first time buyers and home movers with gross mortgage lending of £30 billion.
 
·
Customer deposits increased by £11.5 billion, or 5 per cent, to £235.6 billion, predominantly from instant access and tax free ISA accounts rather than more expensive term deposits.
 

RETAIL (continued)

Strategic vision
Retail’s goal is to be recognised by customers as the UK’s best bank.  This will be achieved by building deep and enduring customer relationships which deliver real value to customers.  Retail believes this strategy will drive sustainable long term value for all stakeholders.  A deep understanding of customers and their needs combined with highly efficient and effective processes will allow more investment in products and services that customers really value.  Retail is increasing its capabilities through the integration of Lloyds TSB and HBOS which presents a great opportunity to use the best from each heritage and significantly improve systems and processes.  This includes extending Lloyds TSB’s strong customer insight capabilities to Halifax and Bank of Scotland.  Success for Retail will be reflected in enhanced customer service resulting in strong customer advocacy which in turn leads to lower customer acquisition costs, increased share of wallet and improved customer retention.

Progress against strategic initiatives

Deep and enduring customer relationships
The Retail strategy is to build deep and enduring relationships so that customers choose Retail’s relationship brands (Lloyds TSB, Halifax and Bank of Scotland) for more of their financial needs.  This is being achieved through offering a broad range of products that address customer needs, alongside superior customer service and advice.  Retail also continues to work to ensure customers are the focus of business development including instituting a number of programmes to ensure key customer needs underpin ongoing product and service development.

During 2010, Retail successfully delivered a number of elements of the strategy, with a focus on rebuilding trust with customers.  A primary focus was the development of products that are simple, transparent and easy for customers to understand.  Customer demand for these products has been very positive.  For example, the customer response to the Halifax’s Clarity card has been strong with 145,000 new cards issued since its launch in July 2010.  This card leads the market in terms of transparency and simplicity with a single customer interest rate and no usage fees for balance transfers, cash withdrawals and international usage.

Retail has also continued to develop its current account switching facility, which plays a key role in building a strong relationship with new customers, by making it easy for customers to switch.  Experience has shown that after customers use the current account switching facility, they are over 70 per cent more likely to transfer their primary current account.

Creating products and services that customers value
A focus on customers, including active use of Retail’s strong customer insight capability, ensures that products and services are customer-led in a highly competitive market.  Retail has a strong record of award-winning products and services.

Retail is committed to supporting the housing market and working with customers to find solutions to their changing situations.  An example of this is the recently launched Equity Support Scheme that enables customers with low or negative equity to move home.  This scheme recognises that there are significant numbers of customers who are making payments on their mortgage and have a desire to move but due to lack of equity have been unable to do so.  Retail has also extended its popular first time buyer ‘Lend a Hand’ mortgage to all home movers.  This product helps customers through allowing friends and family to contribute to a savings account supporting a mortgage.


RETAIL (continued)

Retail continues to work to deliver products and services that address customer needs.  An example of this is the recently launched Halifax Cash ISA Promise.  In the month following the launch in October 2010 the ISA business performed significantly ahead of expectations with 44,000 accounts transferred, despite the launch being outside of the traditional ISA season.  This industry leading promise addresses the poor transfer times between ISA providers, by promising to pay interest on new cash ISAs from the completed application date rather than when funds are transferred into the account, often weeks later.  The other parts of the promise are increased information on cash ISA interest rates and an assurance that all cash ISAs are open to both new and existing customers.

Continually improving customer service
Retail continues to benefit from the opportunities afforded by its heritage businesses and is taking the best from the Lloyds TSB and HBOS franchises to create ‘one best way’ of doing things.  Integration, together with changes in working practices, will deliver significant increases in efficiency which will allow further investment in the products and services that customers really value and will deliver a better customer experience.

Internet banking continues to grow in popularity amongst Retail’s customers.  To support the development and broaden the potential of this format Retail has introduced a new internet platform which was rolled out to Lloyds TSB customers during 2010.  One example of the new services being delivered on this platform is Money Manager which provides an innovative tool for customers to better manage their finances.

Retail has been implementing new sales and customer service technology for mortgages and bancassurance across the network.  These are being delivered to improve the quality of customer advice and increase the speed of decision making.  The Mortgage Sales Platform offers customers a more comprehensive interview experience, a faster mortgage decision and ‘one best way’ of selling mortgages across its brands.  In the bancassurance business a new platform has been rolled out to advisors, with tools which better identify customer’s needs.  This innovative platform also brings portfolio modelling tools to the Retail market.

Mobile banking is another key growth area and Retail is investing to make financial services more accessible and to increase the range of options available to customers.  Lloyds TSB has launched a mobile banking application that allows customers to manage their money on the move, including transferring funds between accounts via their mobiles.  Lloyds TSB now also offers a range of free text alerts, including balance updates and near limit alerts, thereby helping customers to better control their finances.
Integration
Retail has made good progress with integration, delivering significant cost savings and increased productivity as well as optimising performance across the business.  The division has delivered run-rate synergies of £529 million at the end of 2010 and is on track to achieve run-rate synergies of £867 million by the end of 2011.

In 2010, Retail commenced the roll-out of a single counter system across all its branches providing a strong and efficient platform with increased functionality to further improve customer service.  This is being supported by a ‘one best way’ programme that ensures there is a single efficient and effective approach to all major processes.

As part of the integration Lloyds TSB’s Protection for Life bancassurance product range was extended into Halifax and Bank of Scotland.  The impact of these changes has already been significant with close to 50 per cent uplift in protection new business premiums in Halifax and Bank of Scotland.

 
RETAIL (continued)

Financial performance
Profit before tax increased to £4,716 million compared to £1,382 million in 2009, an increase of £3,334 million.  This included an increase of £698 million in respect of the fair value unwind.

Profit before tax and fair value unwind increased to £3,611 million, a significant improvement compared to £975 million in 2009.  This increase in profit was driven by strong income growth, tight cost control and a significant reduction in the impairment charge in the context of a stabilising economy.

Total income increased by £1,211 million, or 12 per cent, to £10,985 million.  This was driven by a strong increase in net interest income of £1,408 million, partially offset by a reduction in other income of £197 million.

Net interest income increased by 18 per cent, with a significant increase in the net interest margin to 2.46 per cent, from 1.97 per cent in 2009.  The asset margins expanded significantly during 2010 from 1.18 per cent to 1.93 per cent as a result of decreases in LIBOR to base rate spread and stable customer interest rates.  The asset margin also widened partly as a result of mortgage customers continuing to move onto, and staying on, standard variable rates and assets being priced to more appropriately reflect risk and rising funding costs.  The liability margin, on the other hand, has reduced from 1.41 per cent to 0.87 per cent as the effect of lower LIBOR to base rate spreads was partially offset by the reduction of expensive deposit balances.

Other income decreased by 11 per cent in 2010 to £1,607 million from £1,804 million largely as a result of changes to current account overdraft charges.  Retail continues to focus on having fees and rates that customers understand.  It is believed that this will result in stronger customer relationships as well as supporting the deepening of these relationships.  An example of this focus is the changes to the overdraft charging structure for Halifax and Bank of Scotland personal current accounts at the end of 2009, which delivers a more suitable product proposition and an improved customer experience and resulted in a reduction in other income of approximately £90 million.  Similarly, the changes to the Lloyds TSB current account pricing model, which became effective at the end of 2010, provide a simpler, more sustainable proposition for customers, resulting in an overall reduction in the cost of overdraft usage.

Total income is analysed as follows and reflects the trends discussed above:
       
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
       
£m 
 
£m 
 
                 
Mortgages and Savings
     
4,739 
 
3,667 
 
29 
Consumer Banking
     
6,246 
 
6,107 
 
Total income
     
10,985 
 
9,774 
 
12 

Operating expenses remained well controlled and increased by 2 per cent, against an increase in total income of 12 per cent, reflecting ongoing cost control and synergies from the integration.  The cost:income ratio for the year improved to 42.3 per cent compared to 46.7 per cent in 2009.

The impairment charge on loans and advances decreased by £1,480 million, or 35 per cent, to £2,747 million reflecting the stabilising economy, more stable house prices, low interest rates and prudent lending criteria.  As a percentage of average advances, the impairment charge decreased to 0.74 per cent, significantly lower than 1.11 per cent in 2009.  The secured impairment charge reduced to £292 million from £789 million in 2009 while the unsecured impairment charge reduced to £2,455 million from £3,438 million in 2009.


RETAIL (continued)

The fair value unwind net credit of £1,105 million compares with £407 million in 2009.  The net fair value unwind credit was larger than in 2009 which reflected a smaller charge related to the fixed rate mortgage portfolios as mortgages reached the end of their fixed term and borrowers moved to standard variable products.  This was partially offset by a reduction in the credit attributed to the fixed rate savings portfolio as fixed rate term deposits, existing prior to acquisition, matured.

Balance sheet progress
Total loans and advances to customers decreased by £7.4 billion, or 2 per cent, to £363.7 billion, compared to 31 December 2009.  This resulted from reduced customer demand for credit and customers continuing to reduce their personal indebtedness.  The reduction in lending to customers was partly the result of the repayment of unsecured debt where balances reduced by £3.6 billion, or 12 per cent.

Secured balances were broadly stable as Retail maintained its strong commitment to the housing market and first time buyers.  The proportion of mortgages on standard variable rate or equivalent products now stands at 48 per cent and is expected to rise only modestly during 2011.

The UK mortgage market for both house purchase and re-mortgaging was slightly lower in 2010, with gross market lending of £136.1 billion compared to £143.3 billion in 2009.  Retail’s gross new mortgage lending was £30 billion in 2010.  This lending included full delivery on agreed lending commitments.  New mortgage lending continued to be focused on supporting the housing market with 70 per cent of the lending being for house purchase rather than re-mortgaging.  Retail remains the largest lender to first time buyers in the market helping over 50,000 customers buy their first home.  It also continues to be an industry leader in its support for shared equity and shared ownership schemes.

Risk-weighted assets decreased by £19.3 billion, or 15 per cent, to £109.3 billion in 2010.  This reduction was driven by lower lending balances, recalibrated downturn loss given default rates and the lower risk mix of the loan portfolio with reduced exposure to unsecured lending.

Total customer deposits increased by £11.5 billion, or 5 per cent, to £235.6 billion in the year.  The growth was predominantly from instant access and tax free cash ISA accounts, rather than more expensive term deposits.  This approach has helped support the net interest margin.  Retail continues to perform well in the savings market, with a strong stable of savings brands which can be tailored to customer demands.

Non-core operations
Non-core operations consist of specialist mortgages (self-certified and sub-prime), selected third-party branded loans and selected third-party branded credit cards.  As at 31 December 2010, these operations included loans and advances to customers of £30.6 billion (31 December 2009: £33.5 billion) and risk weighted assets of £11.2 billion (31 December 2009: £13.2 billion).  In 2010 they also contributed income of £591 million (compared to £388 million in 2009) and an impairment charge of £124 million (compared to £253 million in 2009).  In addition to the non-core assets, Retail continues to progress plans to divest other retail assets and liabilities in line with the state aid obligations.


WHOLESALE

   
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Net interest income
 
4,426 
 
4,710 
 
(6)
Other income
 
4,136 
 
4,199 
 
(2)
Total income
 
8,562 
 
8,909 
 
(4)
Costs:
           
Operating expenses
 
(3,744)
 
(4,106)
 
Impairment of tangible fixed assets
 
(150)
 
– 
   
   
(3,894)
 
(4,106)
 
Trading surplus
 
4,668 
 
4,803 
 
(3)
Impairment
 
(4,446)
 
(15,683)
 
72 
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
 
(95)
 
(720)
 
87 
Profit (loss) before tax and fair value unwind
 
127 
 
(11,600)
     
Fair value unwind
 
3,130 
 
6,897 
 
(55)
Profit (loss) before tax
 
3,257 
 
(4,703)
   
             
Corporate Markets
 
(697)
 
(11,736)
 
94 
Treasury and Trading
 
428 
 
595 
 
(28)
Asset Finance
 
396 
 
(459)
   
Profit (loss) before tax and fair value unwind
 
127 
 
(11,600)
   
             
Banking net interest margin
 
1.88% 
 
1.52% 
   
Banking asset margin
 
1.28% 
 
1.02% 
   
Banking liability margin
 
1.29% 
 
1.16% 
   
Cost:income ratio (excl. impairment of tangible fixed assets)
 
43.7% 
 
46.1% 
   
Impairment as a % of average advances
 
2.08% 
 
5.92% 
   
             
             
   
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
 
Change 
Key balance sheet and other items
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
             
             
Loans and advances to customers
 
173.2 
 
191.8 
 
(10)
Loans and advances to banks
 
12.4 
 
18.9 
 
(34)
Debt securities
 
25.8 
 
31.7 
 
(19)
Available-for-sale financial assets
 
29.5 
 
36.9 
 
(20)
   
240.9 
 
279.3 
 
(14)
Customer deposits
           
Customer deposits excluding repos
 
114.1 
 
117.9 
 
(3)
Repos
 
10.2 
 
35.5 
 
(71)
   
124.3 
 
153.4 
 
(19)
Risk-weighted assets
 
222.7 
 
286.0 
 
(22)


 
WHOLESALE (continued)

Key highlights
 
·  
Profit before tax was £3,257 million compared to a loss before tax of £4,703 million in 2009.
 
·  
Profit before tax and fair value unwind was £127 million, a £11,727 million improvement on the loss of £11,600 million in 2009, primarily reflecting the significant decrease in the level of impairment charge.
 
·  
Net interest income decreased by 6 per cent to £4,426 million. This decrease reflected the lower interest earning asset balances, in-line with targeted balance sheet reductions and lower net interest income in Treasury and Trading, partially offset by a 36 basis point increase in the banking net interest margin.
 
·  
Other income decreased marginally to £4,136 million, primarily reflecting a reduction from the higher market volatility in 2009 in Wholesale Markets and lower operating lease income in Asset Finance, partially offset by investment gains in Wholesale Equity.
 
·  
Operating expenses decreased 9 per cent, reflecting reduced levels of operating lease depreciation and further cost savings achieved from the integration programme, partially offset by additional staff related costs in the Business Support Unit and continued investment in customer facing resource and systems.
 
·  
Impairment charges on financial assets decreased significantly to £4,446 million, compared to £15,683 million in the previous year.  The total impairment charge is 72 per cent lower than last year and continues to be primarily driven by the HBOS heritage corporate real estate and real estate related asset portfolios.
 
·  
Assets decreased by 14 per cent to £240.9 billion continuing on from a 28 per cent reduction in 2009.  This reflects the targeted reduction in the balance sheet, mainly in loans and advances to customers and banks in non-core business and through reductions in debt securities and available-for-sale positions.
 
·  
Customer deposits excluding repos decreased 3 per cent to £114.1 billion, due to a reduction in short-term deposits in Treasury and Trading partially offset by higher deposits in Corporate Markets in line with the Group’s funding strategy.
 
·  
Continued progress in deepening customer relationships.  Cross-selling has increased by 9 per cent, reflecting increased product capabilities and opportunities arising from applying a single sales force model on the combined customer base.
 

WHOLESALE (continued)

Strategic vision
Wholesale’s strategic goal is to be recognised as the UK’s leading, through-the-cycle, relationship-focused wholesale bank.  The mission is to retain and deepen recurring, multi-product customer relationships building on deep insight into customer needs to provide a broad range of banking, risk management and capital market products.

Progress against strategic initiatives

Supporting customers through the cycle
Wholesale’s through-the-cycle commitment to businesses is evidenced by key initiatives such as the SME Business Charter which was awarded the prize for innovation in SME finance by Business Moneyfacts in March 2010.  In 2010, over 100,000 new Commercial start-up customers were attracted and over 200 regional customer events were held across the country, demonstrating our commitment to this segment.  Wholesale’s focus on deepening customer relationships and continued commitment to businesses was again recognised by Finance Directors of commercial and corporate companies who voted Lloyds TSB as Bank of the Year in the CBI/Real FD awards for the sixth year running in May 2010.  In September 2010, our Commercial Finance business was voted as winner in the InterContinental Finance Magazine’s global awards for Alternative Finance Provider of the year – United Kingdom.

Continued investment in Wholesale Markets capabilities has helped customers to diversify their funding sources and manage their interest rate and currency risks.  This successful investment provides the foundations for deeper customer relationships and is earning external recognition which includes the Group being named ‘The most improved European Debt Capital Markets and Syndicate team’ by Euroweek in May 2010 and awarded ‘Best Arranger of UK Loans’ and ‘Best Arranger of Mid-Corporate Loans’ at the 2010 Euroweek Syndicated Loan & Leveraged Finance Awards.

Integrating the businesses
Progress towards creating a single Wholesale Bank by the end of 2011 continues on track, with several notable milestones passed in 2010.  Internal business structures are in place across Wholesale, and around 30 customer and data migrations successfully took place in 2010, representing assets of approximately £50 billion.  The new Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets brand was launched in December, providing a single, comprehensive and consistent corporate banking and financial markets service for our customers.  In the Asset Finance business, the successful integration of Lex and Autolease brands has created one of the UK’s leading car leasing firms.

The focus for 2011 remains on the planning and execution of the remaining 40 migrations and strengthening risk systems, whilst ensuring that we continue to deliver our high levels of customer service.  The division achieved run-rate synergies of £359 million at the end of 2010 and is on track to deliver run-rate synergies of £532 million by the end of 2011.

Prioritising businesses
In 2009, Wholesale systematically reviewed its assets, portfolios and businesses to identify those that would add most value to its relationship-focused strategic vision.  In 2010, Wholesale ensured that investment in product and service capability was directed towards these core growth areas, and explored divestment opportunities for the remaining non-core assets.

Investment and change in the core growth areas continues to be embedded, with new talent joining the Group and new processes introduced to our client facing businesses.  Cross-selling from deepening relationships increased by 9 per cent reflecting these enhanced product capabilities.

WHOLESALE (continued)

A number of disposals of non-core assets were completed during 2010 in line with the planned reduction of Wholesale’s total assets, which includes part of the Group's commitment under the state aid restructuring plan.  Wholesale continues to operate under an oversight and governance framework with the intention always of maximising long-term shareholder value from any asset sale.

Financial performance
Profit before tax was £3,257 million compared to a loss before tax of £4,703 million in 2009.  The improvement of £7,960 million is after taking into account fair value unwind of £3,130 million, which decreased by £3,767 million compared to 2009.

Profit before tax and fair value unwind of £127 million was an £11,727 million improvement on the loss of £11,600 million in 2009, driven by a significant decrease in the impairment charge reflecting the stabilising economic climate, continuing to support previous guidance that the impairment charge peaked in the first half of 2009.

Total income decreased by £347 million, or 4 per cent to £8,562 million mainly driven by a 6 per cent decrease in net interest income.

The decline in net interest income primarily reflects lower interest earning asset balances across loans and receivables in line with the Group’s targeted balance sheet reduction, mainly in loans and advances to customers, debt securities and available for-sale-positions.  Income was affected by higher funding costs and lower lending volumes, although this was partly offset by higher customer margins on new business and from re-pricing on renewals.

Banking net interest income, which excludes trading activity, increased by £330 million, to £3,683 million as lending business continued to be re-priced to reflect customer risk profiles, with lending margins increasing by 26 basis points.  Deposit margins increased moderately, by 13 basis points, reflecting favourable internal liquidity rates, which was partially offset by the impact of lower LIBOR to base rate spreads.  As a result, the banking net interest margin increased by 36 basis points to 1.88 per cent in 2010.  The impact of re-pricing was only partially offset by a decrease in average interest earning assets and liability balances.

Other income decreased by £63 million, or 2 per cent, to £4,136 million, primarily reflecting higher levels of market volatility in 2009 which resulted in mark to market gains in Wholesale Markets, whilst 2010 experienced losses on sale of assets in targeted balance sheet reductions and lower operating lease income.  Other income in 2010 benefited from investment gains in Wholesale Equity as a result of stabilisation in market conditions and improved fund investment performance, strong fee income across structuring and capital markets and more favourable performance in Treasury and Trading.

Operating expenses decreased by £362 million, or 9 per cent, to £3,744 million primarily from a further reduction in the level of operating lease depreciation in Asset Finance and a continued focus on cost management including savings attributable to the integration programme.  This was partially offset by additional costs in the Business Support Unit and continued investment in customer facing resource and systems.

The impairment charge decreased by £11,237 million to £4,446 million in December 2010.  As a percentage of average loans and advances to customers, impairment charge improved to 2.08 per cent in 2010 compared to 5.92 per cent in 2009.  The decrease reflects reductions, notably in the heritage HBOS corporate real estate and real estate related portfolios and heritage HBOS Corporate (UK and US) portfolios and write backs from asset disposals, due to the stabilising economic environment, low interest rates which helped to maintain defaults at reduced levels, the stabilisation of UK real estate prices and prudent provisioning against base case assumptions undertaken on the acquired heritage HBOS portfolios in the first half of 2009.  The decrease further confirms the Group's belief that the impairment charge peaked in the first half of 2009 under base case assumptions.

WHOLESALE (continued)

The share of losses from joint ventures and associates comprises a small loss of £95 million, a decrease of £625 million.  This represents a net reduction in both the value and size of the portfolio compared to the prior year.  The majority of the portfolio is now valued at nil with a remaining portfolio carrying value of approximately £128 million.

Fair value unwind decreased £3,767 million to £3,130 million, mainly due to lower impairments in 2010 relating to the HBOS assets that were fair valued on acquisition.  The decrease was partially offset by charges relating to the expected losses on acquired debt securities and by fair value releases on sales.

Balance sheet progress
The division's asset balances (comprising loans and advances to customers and banks, debt securities and available-for-sale financial assets) reduced by £38.4 billion, or 14 per cent to £240.9 billion, primarily reflecting deleveraging by customers and continuing active de-risking of the balance sheet by either selling down or reducing holdings in debt securities and available-for-sale positions.

Loans and advances to customers decreased £18.6 billion, or 10 per cent to £173.2 billion.  In Corporate Markets, balances decreased by £17.5 billion or 10 per cent, as demand for new corporate lending and refinancing of existing facilities were more than offset by the level of maturities, reflecting a continued trend of subdued corporate lending, customer deleveraging and asset sales in non-core sectors.  Despite this overall reduction, net lending to core customers in the SME sector increased by 2.1 per cent.  In Asset Finance, the decrease of £2.7 billion, or 23 per cent, reflected the targeted reduction in this asset class.  Available for sale financial assets balances reduced by £7.4 billion, or 20 per cent, to £29.5 billion and debt securities decreased by £5.9 billion, or 19 per cent, to £25.8 billion, as Corporate Markets reduced the non-core balance sheet by either selling down or not replenishing total holdings after amortisations or maturities.  Loans and advances to banks decreased £6.5 billion, or 34 per cent as the division refocused the balance sheet.

Customer deposits excluding repos decreased by £3.8 billion, or 3 per cent to £114.1 billion, due to a reduction in short-term deposits in Treasury and Trading, which was partially offset by higher deposits in Corporate Markets in line with the Group’s funding strategy.

Risk-weighted assets decreased by £63.3 billion, or 22 per cent to £222.7 billion, primarily reflecting the balance sheet reductions and the move to Foundation IRB from Advanced IRB for all HBOS non-retail portfolios.

Non-core operations
Non-core consists of businesses and/or business lines that are inconsistent with Wholesale’s relationship-focused strategic vision of capital and liquidity efficient growth, driven by broad and deep customer relationships and within a prudent risk framework.

As at 31 December 2010, operations and portfolios considered to be non-core included assets of £126.9 billion (2009: £158.3 billion) which included £71.2 billion (2009: £83.1 billion) of loans and advances to customers, £25.4 billion (2009: £31.5 billion) of debt securities, £22.2 billion (2009: £32.0 billion) of available-for-sale financial assets and other assets of £8.1 billion (2009: £11.7 billion).  Non-core risk-weighted assets were £94.8 billion (2009: £135.4 billion).  Non-core portfolios and businesses include £4.9 billion (2009: £4.9 billion) of customer deposits.

In 2010, non-core businesses generated income of £3,022 million and impairment of £3,170 million, compared to 2009 income of £3,573 million and impairment of £13,496 million.


WHOLESALE (continued)

Corporate Markets
   
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Net interest income
 
3,669 
 
3,756 
 
(2)
Other income
 
2,471 
 
2,541 
 
(3)
Total income
 
6,140 
 
6,297 
 
(2)
Costs:
           
Operating expenses
 
(2,410)
 
(2,461)
 
Impairment of tangible fixed assets
 
(150)
 
– 
   
   
(2,560)
 
(2,461)
 
(4)
Trading surplus
 
3,580 
 
3,836 
 
(7)
Impairment
 
(4,182)
 
(14,855)
 
72 
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
 
(95)
 
(717)
 
87 
Loss before tax and fair value unwind
 
(697)
 
(11,736)
 
94 
             
Cost:income ratio (excl. impairment of tangible fixed assets)
 
39.3% 
 
39.1% 
   
Impairment as a % of average advances
 
2.08% 
 
6.09% 
   
           
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
 
Change 
Key balance sheet and other items
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
             
Loans and advances to customers
 
160.2 
 
177.7 
 
(10)
Risk-weighted assets
 
202.1 
 
263.8 
 
(23)

Loss before tax and fair value unwind decreased by £11,039 million to £697 million, due to a significant decrease in the impairment charge.  Net interest income decreased by £87 million or 2 per cent.  This reflected lower interest earning asset balances as a result of the ongoing focus on reducing the balance sheet.  Despite increased funding costs net interest income benefited from improved margins from customer re-pricing.

Other income was £70 million or 3 per cent lower, primarily due to increased market volatility in 2009 which resulted in mark to market gains in Wholesale Markets which did not reoccur in 2010.  Additionally other income benefited from investment gains in Wholesale Equity as a result of stabilising market conditions, and strong fee income across structuring and capital markets.

Operating expenses decreased by £51 million to £2,410 million due to continued synergy benefits, partially offset by investment in the Business Support Unit as well as customer facing resource and systems.

The impairment charge decreased by £10,673 million to £4,182 million reflecting a sustained decrease since the peak in first half 2009.  As well as reflecting stabilising economic conditions, a significant amount of the decrease was also due to the application in 2009 of Lloyds Banking Group provisioning policy and risk review processes which were applied to the heritage HBOS corporate real estate and real estate related portfolios and heritage HBOS Corporate (UK & US) portfolio.

Impairment of tangible fixed assets of £150 million was incurred on assets held on the balance sheet as a result of the consolidation of certain entities over which the Group exercised control.  A £365 million loss was recorded in 2010 on the disposal of these entities which is excluded from the Group’s combined businesses profit before tax.


WHOLESALE (continued)

Treasury and Trading
   
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Net interest income
 
324 
 
544 
 
(40)
Other income
 
322 
 
238 
 
35 
Total income
 
646 
 
782 
 
(17)
Operating expenses
 
(218)
 
(187)
 
(17)
Profit before tax and fair value unwind
 
428 
 
595 
 
(28)
             
Cost:income ratio
 
33.7% 
 
23.9% 
   
             
             
   
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
 
Change 
Key balance sheet and other items
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
             
Loans and advances to customers
 
4.1 
 
2.5 
 
64 
Risk-weighted assets
 
8.6 
 
8.4 
 

Profit before tax and fair value unwind decreased by £167 million to £428 million due to lower net interest income.

Total income decreased by £136 million, or 17 per cent.  Interest income reduced as the highly volatile interest rate market evident in early 2009 was not repeated in 2010.  Other income performance benefited from strong customer demand for interest rate, foreign exchange and risk management products in 2010.  Trading flows are managed with the overriding aim of providing a service to customers, whilst maintaining Treasury and Trading’s conservative risk appetite.

Operating expenses increased by £31 million to £218 million reflecting the investment in people and systems, in particular back office infrastructure, to support internal risk management and the customer franchise.


WHOLESALE (continued)

Asset Finance
   
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Net interest income
 
433 
 
410 
 
Other income
 
1,343 
 
1,420 
 
(5)
Total income
 
1,776 
 
1,830 
 
(3)
Operating expenses
 
(1,116)
 
(1,458)
 
23 
Trading surplus
 
660 
 
372 
 
77 
Impairment
 
(264)
 
(828)
 
68 
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
 
– 
 
(3)
   
Profit (loss) before tax and fair value unwind
 
396 
 
(459)
   
             
Cost:income ratio
 
62.8% 
 
79.7% 
   
Impairment as a % of average advances
 
2.34% 
 
5.86% 
   
             
             
   
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
 
Change 
Key balance sheet and other items
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
             
Loans and advances to customers
 
8.9 
 
11.6 
 
(23)
Operating lease assets
 
3.0 
 
3.4 
 
(12)
Risk-weighted assets
 
12.0 
 
13.8 
 
(13)

Profit before tax and fair value unwind was £396 million compared to a loss before tax and fair value unwind of £459 million in December 2009.  The £855 million improvement was due to a lower impairment charge and lower operating expenses.

Total income decreased by £54 million, or 3 per cent, to £1,776 million as a result of lower business volumes on assets held under operating leases.  The lower business volumes are in-line with a targeted reduction in this asset class and were partly offset by stronger margins.

Operating expenses decreased by £342 million, or 23 per cent, to £1,116 million, reflecting reduced depreciation charges on assets held under operating leases due to lower fleet size and a year on year improvement in used car values, and strong cost management and savings achieved from integration.

The impairment charge decreased by £564 million to £264 million, reflecting a stabilising economic environment and an improvement in market conditions for both the retail and non-retail consumer finance businesses.  The lower impairment charge has been driven by a reduction in new cases entering arrears, the reduced book size and a better mix in the credit quality of new business being written over the last two years.

WEALTH AND INTERNATIONAL

   
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Net interest income
 
1,176 
 
1,217 
 
(3)
Other income
 
1,160 
 
1,128 
 
Total Income
 
2,336 
 
2,345 
   
Operating expenses
 
(1,536)
 
(1,544)
 
Trading surplus
 
800 
 
801 
   
Impairment
 
(5,988)
 
(4,078)
 
(47)
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
 
(8)
 
(21)
 
62 
Loss before tax and fair value unwind
 
(5,196)
 
(3,298)
 
(58)
Fair value unwind
 
372 
 
942 
 
(61)
Loss before tax
 
(4,824)
 
(2,356)
   
             
Wealth
 
269 
 
198 
 
36 
International
 
(5,465)
 
(3,496)
 
(56)
Loss before tax and fair value unwind
 
(5,196)
 
(3,298)
 
(58)
             
Banking net interest margin
 
1.63% 
 
1.71% 
   
Banking asset margin
 
1.22% 
 
1.26% 
   
Banking liability margin
 
0.83% 
 
0.82% 
   
Cost:income ratio
 
65.8% 
 
65.8% 
   
Impairment as a % of average advances
 
8.90% 
 
6.04% 
   
             
             
   
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
 
Change 
Key balance sheet and other items
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
             
Loans and advances to customers
 
55.3 
 
63.5 
 
(13)
Customer deposits
 
32.8 
 
29.0 
 
13 
Risk-weighted assets
 
58.7 
 
63.2 
 
(7)


WEALTH AND INTERNATIONAL (continued)

Key highlights
 
·  
Loss before tax increased to £4,824 million compared to £2,356 million in 2009.
 
·  
Loss before tax and fair value unwind increased by £1,898 million to £5,196 million, compared to £3,298 million in 2009, due to a higher impairment charge, predominantly in Ireland.
 
·  
In Wealth, profit before tax increased by 36 per cent to £269 million.  However, this was more than offset by the International loss before tax which increased by 56 per cent to £5,465 million.
 
·  
Net interest income decreased by 3 per cent to £1,176 million, as an 8 basis points decline in the banking net interest margin more than offset the favourable impact of foreign currency movements, particularly the Australian dollar, and the income on the £7 billion European loan portfolio transferred in from the Wholesale division in the second half of 2009.
 
·  
Operating expenses decreased by 1 per cent to £1,536 million, with cost savings achieved from integration, particularly in the asset management businesses in Wealth, partly offset by investment in International’s German deposit taking operation, increased resources in business support functions and the effect of stronger foreign currency rates.
 
·  
The impairment charge amounted to £5,988 million, compared to £4,078 million in 2009, reflecting the material deterioration in the economic environment in Ireland in the last quarter of 2010 that resulted in EU-IMF financial support in late November 2010 and the tightening of liquidity in the second half of 2010 in regional Australian property markets to which the Group is exposed.
 
·  
Loans and advances to customers decreased by £8.2 billion, or 13 per cent, to £55.3 billion, reflecting net repayments of £4.1 billion, and additional impairment provisions in the International businesses, partly offset by foreign exchange movements of £1.1 billion.
 
·  
Customer deposits increased by £3.8 billion, or 13 per cent, to £32.8 billion, due to strong inflows in UK Private Banking and Bank of Scotland Germany, partly offset by outflows in Ireland following the closure of the Irish retail branch network.
 
·  
Against its strategic objectives, Wealth has demonstrated continuing strength in client acquisition through the UK franchise with a 12 per cent increase in customer numbers.  In International, resources have been deployed to manage arrears, and the balance sheet reduction strategy resulted in underlying local currency advances decreasing by £4.1 billion, or 7 per cent.
 

WEALTH AND INTERNATIONAL (continued)

Strategic vision
Wealth provides strong growth opportunities for the Group and, through deepening the relationships with existing Group clients alongside targeted external customer acquisition, Wealth’s goal is to be recognised as the trusted adviser to expatriate and private banking clients both in the UK and selected international markets.  Wealth’s initial focus in the UK is to increase the penetration of its offering into the Group's existing customer base by the referral of wealthier customers to its private banking businesses where their wider financial needs can be more effectively met. Outside the UK, Wealth will be building on the strengths of its brand portfolio and existing expatriate, wealth management and private banking propositions.

In the International businesses, the priority is to maximise value in the medium term.  International’s immediate focus is on close management of the lending portfolio, particularly in the Irish business, and re-pricing assets where appropriate.  At the same time International is delivering operational efficiencies, reshaping its business models and rightsizing the balance sheet to reflect the ongoing environment.

Progress against strategic initiatives

Deep and enduring customer relationships
In Wealth, the focus has been on driving additional income growth from the Group's affluent and high net worth client base through more effective use of the opportunities afforded by the Retail and Wholesale franchises to cross sell Wealth products to these customers.  During 2010, customer segmentation across the Wealth businesses has been implemented and businesses transferred as appropriate to align to this segmentation, the customer referrals model has been formalised, and a new UK investment proposition launched.  Continuing progress was demonstrated through a 7 per cent increase in Wealth relationship customers in 2010, including a 12 per cent increase in UK Wealth, and a 16 per cent increase in Wealth's customer deposits.

Maximising value in the short to medium term
In International, the focus remains on managing the impaired asset portfolio and continued strengthening of the control environment.  Redeployment of resource from front line activity and the wider Group to manage arrears and collections is now complete and business support units are fully operational.  The business aims to de-risk and reduce the balance sheet where possible, with net repayments in the International portfolio contributing £4.1 billion to the reduction in underlying local currency customer advances.

As previously announced, the Group completed a strategic review of Bank of Scotland (Ireland) Limited (BOSI) during the year, concluding that there was little opportunity for scalable growth in the future and that the business currently carried on by BOSI would merge, pursuant to a court process, into Bank of Scotland plc.  This announcement followed the closure earlier in the year of BOSI’s retail and intermediary business in Ireland, including all 44 Halifax retail branches.

The merger completed on 31 December 2010 at which point BOSI ceased to exist and its banking licence was relinquished.  Bank of Scotland plc will utilise its extensive operational and management capability, including general and credit management, oversight and control, within the UK in relation to the Irish portfolio.  This will support the efficient rundown of the remaining Irish lending portfolio.

In order to retain local administrative capability, historic knowledge and continuity of customer relationships, Bank of Scotland plc has entered into an agreement with an independent service company which will perform various administrative functions relating to the Irish business.  Under this proposal the majority of BOSI employees have transferred to the service company.

WEALTH AND INTERNATIONAL (continued)

Integration
Wealth and International is making excellent progress with the integration of its businesses with an annual synergies run-rate as at 31 December 2010 of £240 million, substantially achieving the end of 2011 run rate target of £242 million.  The transfer of £50 billion of funds under management from Insight Investment to Scottish Widows Investment Partnership was successfully completed in the first half of 2010 along with the sale of Employee Equity Solutions and Bank of Scotland Portfolio Management Service.  In the second half of 2010 the division successfully completed the integration of its Spanish businesses, while the UK Private Banking, Channel Islands and Wholesale Europe integration programmes are progressing well ensuring Wealth and International is on track to deliver targeted cost savings by the end of 2011.

Financial performance by business unit

Wealth
 
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Net interest income
 
345 
 
383 
 
(10)
Other income
 
1,018 
 
1,003 
 
Total income
 
1,363 
 
1,386 
 
(2)
Operating expenses
 
(1,047)
 
(1,119)
 
Trading surplus
 
316 
 
267 
 
18 
Impairment
 
(46)
 
(71)
 
35 
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
 
(1)
 
   
Profit before tax and fair value unwind
 
269 
 
198 
 
36 
             
Cost:income ratio
 
76.8% 
 
80.7% 
   
Impairment as a % of average advances
 
0.48% 
 
0.70% 
   
             
   
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
 
Change 
Key balance sheet and other items
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
             
Loans and advances to customers
 
9.1 
 
9.2 
 
(1)
Customer deposits
 
26.8 
 
23.2 
 
16 
Risk-weighted assets
 
10.4 
 
10.0 
 

Profit before tax and fair value unwind increased by 36 per cent to £269 million due to lower costs and lower impairment charges.

Total income decreased by 2 per cent to £1,363 million.  Net interest income decreased by 10 per cent, reflecting continued margin pressure driven by low base rates and a competitive deposit market.  Other income increased by 1 per cent, as growth was constrained by lower asset management fee income following the sale of the external fund management business of Insight Investment in November 2009.

Operating expenses decreased by 6 per cent, driven by cost savings from integration, particularly in the Asset Management business and also include the effect of the sale of Insight Investment.  On a like for like basis, excluding the costs of Insight Investment operating expenses decreased by 1 per cent.

The impairment charge decreased by 35 per cent reflecting strong credit management and improved collections and recoveries processes in 2010.

Customer deposits have increased by £3.6 billion, or 16 per cent, reflecting strong growth in the UK Private Banking business driven by the success of the Reserve savings account.

WEALTH AND INTERNATIONAL (continued)

Funds under management
   
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
   
£bn 
 
£bn 
         
SWIP:
       
Internal
 
118.2 
 
111.7 
External
 
28.0 
 
30.0 
   
146.2 
 
141.7 
Other Wealth:
       
St James’s Place
 
27.0 
 
21.4 
Invista Real Estate
 
5.3 
 
5.4 
Private and International Banking
 
13.5 
 
15.6 
Closing funds under management
 
192.0 
 
184.1 
         
   
Year ended 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
Year ended 
31 Dec 
2009 
   
£bn 
 
£bn 
Opening funds under management
 
184.1 
 
244.9 
Inflows:
       
SWIP and Insight
– internal
 
2.0 
 
7.1 
 
– external
 
8.9 
 
33.1 
Other
 
6.7 
 
4.1 
   
17.6 
 
44.3 
Outflows:
       
SWIP and Insight
– internal
 
(5.6)
 
(6.8)
 
– external
 
(13.3)
 
(26.4)
Other
 
(5.1)
 
(4.0)
   
(24.0)
 
(37.2)
Investment return, expenses and commission
 
15.1 
 
16.4 
Net operating increase (decrease) in funds1
 
8.7 
 
23.5 
Sale of Insight and Bank of Scotland Portfolio Management Service2
 
(0.8)
 
(84.3)
Closing funds under management
 
192.0 
 
184.1 

1
Includes Insight Investment’s external fund management business up to disposal on 2 November 2009.
2
Insight Investments was sold on 2 November 2009.  The Bank of Scotland Portfolio Management Service business was transferred to Rathbone Brothers Plc over the course of 2010.

Funds under management of £192.0 billion increased by £7.9 billion.  Net outflows of £6.4 billion reflect an exceptional withdrawal from a single institutional investor in SWIP, partially offset by strong net inflows in St. James’s Place plc.  Increases in global equity values, particularly in the second half of 2010, increased funds under management by a further £15.1 billion.

In October 2010, Invista Real Estate announced that its contracts to manage the Group's funds had been terminated on 12 months notice and that these contracts, representing £2.4 billion of Invista's total funds under management, will be managed in future by SWIP.  Invista Real Estate has commenced an orderly realisation of its assets, including the remaining investment management business, and plans to return the proceeds of these realisations to shareholders.

WEALTH AND INTERNATIONAL (continued)

International
 
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Net interest income
 
831 
 
834 
   
Other income
 
142 
 
125 
 
14 
Total income
 
973 
 
959 
 
Operating expenses
 
(489)
 
(425)
 
(15)
Trading surplus
 
484 
 
534 
 
(9)
Impairment
 
(5,942)
 
(4,007)
 
(48)
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
 
(7)
 
(23)
 
70 
Loss before tax and fair value unwind
 
(5,465)
 
(3,496)
 
(56)
             
Cost:income ratio
 
50.3% 
 
44.3% 
   
Impairment as a % of average advances
 
10.30% 
 
6.99% 
     
               
               
   
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
 
Change 
Key balance sheet and other items
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
             
Loans and advances to customers
 
46.2 
 
54.3 
 
(15)
Customer deposits
 
6.0 
 
5.8 
 
Risk-weighted assets
 
48.3 
 
53.2 
 
(9)

Loss before tax and fair value unwind increased by £1,969 million to £5,465 million due to a higher impairment charge, reflecting an increase of £1,315 million in Ireland and £513 million in Australia.

Total income increased by 1 per cent, but was 7 per cent lower in constant currency. This reflects lower interest earning assets and the increased strain of higher impaired assets, partly offset by additional income on the £7 billion European loan portfolio transferred from Wholesale division in the second half of 2009.

Operating expenses increased by 15 per cent, partially due to foreign exchange movements.  In constant currency, operating expenses increased by 12 per cent reflecting the development of International’s deposit taking operation in Germany, increased risk management resources to manage impaired asset portfolios in Ireland and Australia and costs associated with the closure of the Irish business.


WEALTH AND INTERNATIONAL (continued)

The impairment charge and loans and advances to customers are summarised by key geography in the following table.
   
Impairment charge
 
Loans and advances
to customers
                 
   
2010 
 
2009 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
                 
Ireland
 
4,264 
 
2,949 
 
19.6 
 
25.0 
Australia
 
1,362 
 
849 
 
12.3 
 
13.0 
Wholesale Europe
 
210 
 
129 
 
6.9 
 
8.5 
Latin America/Middle East
 
97 
 
69 
 
0.6 
 
0.6 
Netherlands
 
 
11 
 
6.8 
 
7.2 
   
5,942 
 
4,007 
 
46.2 
 
54.3 

The impairment charge increased by £1,935 million, or 48 per cent, to £5,942 million due to increased impairment charges in Ireland, particularly in the last quarter of 2010 as a result of downward revisions in the Group's Irish economic assumptions, and increased impairment charges in Australia as a result of significant contractions in liquidity in regional property markets to which the Group has exposure in the second half of 2010.

The lower credit in respect of the fair value unwind reflects the unwind profile of the original fair value adjustment which anticipated a peak in the impairment charge in 2009 based on a faster economic recovery in Ireland than is now being experienced.

Balance sheet progress
Loans and advances to customers decreased by £8.1 billion or 15 per cent, to £46.2 billion due to net repayments of £4.1 billion across all businesses and higher impairment provisions, partly offset by an increase due to foreign exchange movements of £1.1 billion.  The division is focused on de-risking and right-sizing the balance sheet, focusing on key Group relationships, as well as reducing concentrations in Commercial Real Estate.  In the International businesses, drawn exposures in local currency have decreased with limited new business written within a tightened risk appetite that has been applied across the division since early 2009.

Customer deposits increased by £0.2 billion, or 3 per cent, to £6 billion with a strong performance in Bank of Scotland Germany, which has now raised over €4 billion of deposits since its launch in January 2009, offset by a fall in customer deposits in Ireland following the closure of the division’s Irish retail business.

Non-core operations
Consistent with the division's strategic approach to maximising value in the medium term, a number of businesses are considered to be non-core, predominately the remaining Irish lending portfolio.  As at 31 December 2010,
non-core businesses included loans and advances to customers of £37.2 billion (2009: £44.3 billion), risk weighted assets of £35.0 billion (2009: £40.1 billion) and customer deposits of £0.3 billion (2009: £3.7 billion).  In 2010, these non-core operations contributed income of £657 million (2009: £744 million) and an impairment charge of £5,767 million (2009: £3,889 million).


 

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

INSURANCE

   
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Net interest income
 
(263)
 
(287)
 
Other income
 
2,814 
 
2,944 
 
(4)
Total income
 
2,551 
 
2,657 
 
(4)
Insurance claims
 
(542)
 
(637)
 
15 
Total income, net of insurance claims
 
2,009 
 
2,020 
 
(1)
Operating expenses
 
(854)
 
(974)
 
12 
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
 
(10)
 
(22)
 
55 
Profit before tax and fair value unwind
 
1,145 
 
1,024 
 
12 
Fair value unwind
 
(43)
 
(49)
 
12 
Profit before tax
 
1,102 
 
975 
 
13 
             
Profit before tax and fair value unwind – before
impact of PPI new business closure
 
1,215 
 
1,024 
 
19 
Other income – impact of PPI new business closure
 
(70)
 
– 
   
Profit before tax and fair value unwind
 
1,145 
 
1,024 
 
12 
             
Profit before tax and fair value unwind
by business unit
           
Life, Pensions and Investments:
           
Before impact of PPI new business closure
 
753 
 
617 
 
22 
PPI new business closure
 
(70)
 
– 
   
UK business
 
683 
 
617 
 
11 
European business
 
110 
 
75 
 
47 
General Insurance
 
372 
 
367 
 
Other1
 
(20)
 
(35)
 
43 
Profit before tax and fair value unwind
 
1,145 
 
1,024 
 
12 
             
EEV new business margin2
 
3.5% 
 
2.5% 
   
Life, Pensions and Investments sales (PVNBP)
 
10,828 
 
13,519 
 
(20)

1
Includes certain Group and divisional costs and income not allocated to business units, as well as the division’s share of results of joint ventures and associates.  2010 includes a gain on disposal of £13 million from the sale of the Group’s joint venture investment in esure.
2
Further detail of the EEV results is shown on pages 145 to 148.


INSURANCE (continued)

Key highlights
 
·  
Profit before tax increased by 13 per cent to £1,102 million, compared to £975 million in 2009.
 
·  
Profit before tax and fair value unwind increased by 19 per cent, to £1,215 million, before a non-recurring charge of £70 million in respect of the Group’s decision to cease writing new payment protection insurance (PPI) business.
 
·  
Other income decreased 4 per cent to £2,814 million largely resulting from the decrease in PPI income as a result of the Group’s decision to cease writing payment protection business, partially off-set by improved new business income and the higher than expected return from improved investment markets.
 
·  
Total income, net of insurance claims decreased by £11 million to £2,009 million, primarily reflecting lower PPI income and claims arising from the freeze events in 2010, which are offset by reduced payment protection insurance claims and improved investment markets.
 
·  
Operating expenses decreased by 12 per cent or £120 million to £854 million due to a continued focus on cost management and delivery of integration synergies.
 
·  
Good progress continues to be made on integration, including the launch of a single bancassurance proposition in June 2010.
 
·  
LP&I UK sales of £10,316 million (PVNBP) reduced by 20 per cent.  The reduction in sales is largely due to the withdrawal of certain lower return HBOS legacy products in the second half of 2009 as the business continued to focus on value over volume and a change in mix towards protection products which, although more profitable, result in relatively lower PVNBP.  An improvement in investment market conditions resulted in a reduction in sales of capital protected products.
 
·  
LP&I UK margins increased to 3.7 per cent from 2.6 per cent in 2009.  The improved margin reflects strategic choices made in respect of product and channel propositions as the legacy businesses are integrated in order to focus on value.  The IRR on new business continues to improve and was in excess of 15 per cent in the year.
 
·  
General Insurance profits increased by 1 per cent to £372 million primarily due to improved unemployment claims experience and integration synergies after taking account of continuing lower income resulting from ceasing to write new PPI business and claims related to the freeze events in 2010.
 
·  
Capital management initiatives resulted in £2.3 billion mitigation of the potential impact of Basel III.

 
INSURANCE (continued)

Strategic vision
The insurance division’s strategic vision is to be recognised as the leading insurance business by its customers, the Group’s shareholders and staff.  The division has four strategic objectives to achieve its vision:
 
·  
complete the integration of the businesses;
 
·  
continue to strengthen its leading brands and grow sales profitably in its targeted markets;
 
·  
enhance the capital management and operational efficiency of existing and future business; and
 
·  
utilise the Group’s strengths in distribution and asset management.

Progress against strategic initiatives

Integrating the business
The integrations of the legacy Life, Pensions and Investments businesses and the legacy General Insurance businesses have continued to progress well.  The division achieved run-rate synergies of £197 million by the end of 2010 and is on track to deliver run-rate synergies of £239 million by the end of 2011.

In the Life, Pensions and Investments UK business good progress was made in integrating the legacy distribution functions in both the Intermediary and Bancassurance channels.  Following the integration of the Scottish Widows and Clerical Medical intermediary sales forces in July 2009, a single Bancassurance proposition was launched in June 2010.

In the General Insurance business an integrated supply chain model was implemented and includes the introduction of personal claims consultants, across all brands, since July 2010.

Sustainable growth
The UK Life, Pensions and Investments business continues to make excellent progress in improving the profitability of the combined product set.  Certain low returning products sold through the HBOS heritage channels have been discontinued and replaced with products providing an improved customer proposition, and enhanced shareholder value.  The decision to change the mix of business from investment to protection products, while resulting in higher margins has contributed relatively lower PVNBP due to the premium size, with PVNBP in the UK business decreasing by 20 per cent.  However the focus on value has resulted in strong increases in new business profits, new business margins and internal rates of return.

This focus on value over volume will continue, establishing a realistic base from which to continue to grow a business that is both profitable and focused on meeting customer needs.

In General Insurance, the combined ratio improved from 83 per cent to 79 per cent. Home insurance delivered a resilient underwriting performance in the year.  Adverse weather conditions at the beginning and end of the year impacted the performance of the home book, however this was partially mitigated by improvements made to the efficiency of the claims processes.

Capital management and operational efficiency
Managing the use of the Group’s capital remains a key objective of the business.  Significant work has been undertaken to optimise the Insurance division’s contribution to Group capital and in 2010 this resulted in £2.3 billion mitigation of the potential impact of Basel III.  The Insurance division remains well capitalised as assessed via the Insurance Groups Directive (IGD) regulatory measure of surplus capital.  The division is progressing its plans to achieve Solvency II compliance.

The Insurance division continues to focus on cost reduction with costs decreasing by 12 per cent in 2010.  Efficiencies have been achieved without compromising the quality of customer service and customer satisfaction scores have remained robust across the division.

INSURANCE (continued)

Leveraging distribution and asset management
An integrated Life, Pensions and Investments UK Bancassurance proposition was launched in June 2010.  The proposition draws on product design and customer service expertise from the two heritages in order to establish a consistent base from which to further leverage the scale of the Group’s Bancassurance operation.

Life, Pensions and Investments

UK Business
   
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Net interest income
 
(227)
 
(273)
 
17 
Other income
 
1,408 
 
1,474 
 
(4)
Total income
 
1,181 
 
1,201 
 
(2)
Operating expenses
 
(498)
 
(584)
 
15 
Profit before tax and fair value unwind
 
683 
 
617 
 
11 
             
Profit before tax and fair value unwind – before impact of PPI new business closure
 
753 
 
617 
 
22 
Other income – impact of PPI new business closure
 
(70)
 
– 
 
– 
Profit before tax and fair value unwind
 
683 
 
617 
 
11 
             
Profit before tax and fair value unwind by business unit
           
New business profit:
Insurance business1
 
332 
 
328 
 
 
Investment business1
 
(65)
 
(196)
 
67 
Total new business profit
 
267 
 
132 
 
102 
Existing business profit
 
464 
 
431 
 
Experience and assumption changes
 
22 
 
54 
 
(59)
Profit before tax and fair value unwind – before impact of PPI new business closure
 
753 
 
617 
 
22 
Other income – PPI new business closure
 
(70)
 
– 
   
Profit before tax and fair value unwind
 
683 
 
617 
 
11 
             
EEV new business margin (UK)
 
3.7% 
 
2.6% 
   
Life, Pensions and Investments sales (PVNBP)
 
10,316 
 
12,973 
 
(20)

1
As required under IFRS, products are split between insurance and investment contracts depending on the level of insurance risk contained. For insurance contracts, the new business profit includes the net present value of profits expected to emerge over the lifetime of the contract, including profits anticipated in periods after the year of sale; for investment contracts the figure reflects the profit in the year of sale only, after allowing for the deferral of income and expenses.  Consequently the recognition of profit from investment contracts is deferred relative to insurance contracts.


INSURANCE (continued)

Life, Pensions and Investments UK (LP&I UK) delivered profit growth, before tax and fair value unwind, of £136 million, or 22 per cent, before taking into account the non-recurring £70 million charge from the Group’s decision to cease writing new payment protection business.  After this charge, profit before tax and fair value unwind was £683 million, an increase of 11 per cent compared to 2009.

Total new business profit increased by £135 million, or 102 per cent, to £267 million.  The increase primarily reflects a reduction in initial commission on OEICs sold through the branch network and cost reductions through integration across our sales channels in addition to progress made on product participation choices.

LP&I UK margins on an EEV basis increased to 3.7 per cent in 2010 from 2.6 per cent in 2009.  The improved margin reflects the strategic choices made in respect of product and channel propositions as the legacy businesses have been integrated in order to focus on value.  The IRR on new business was in excess of 15 per cent in the year.

Existing business profit increased by £33 million, or 8 per cent, to £464 million.  This predominantly reflects higher asset values and a higher assumed rate of return following improved market conditions in the second half of 2009.

Profits arising from experience and assumption changes decreased by £32 million to £22 million mainly reflecting the non-recurrence of benefits recognised in 2009, including a liability management gain of £30 million.  During 2010 a review was undertaken into the charging between the funds of Clerical Medical prior to the acquisition of HBOS, giving rise to a charge of £132 million.  Additionally assumptions regarding future maintenance expenses within the Clerical Medical business were aligned to reflect the heritage Lloyds TSB approach, giving rise to a charge of £119 million.  These charges relate to pre-acquisition matters and were largely offset by the release of fair value provisions.

The capital positions of the UK life insurance companies within the Insurance division remain robust.  The estimated Insurance Groups Directive (IGD) capital surplus for both the Scottish Widows and HBOS Insurance groups remained consistent with last year at £1.3 billion and £1.6 billion, respectively.

European business
Profit before tax increased by 47 per cent to £110 million driven largely by experience and assumption changes.  New business sales reflect difficult economic and market conditions in Germany, our main European market.

INSURANCE (continued)

New business
An analysis of the present value of new business premiums for business written by the Insurance division, split between the UK and European Life, Pensions and Investments Businesses is given below:

Analysis by product
 
UK 
 
Europe 
 
2010 
Total 
 
UK 
 
Europe 
 
2009 
Total 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
                             
Protection
 
574 
 
56 
 
630 
 
519 
 
49 
 
568 
 
11 
Payment protection
 
70 
 
– 
 
70 
 
153 
 
– 
 
153 
 
(54)
Savings and investments
 
1,617 
 
315 
 
1,932 
 
2,689 
 
312 
 
3,001 
 
(36)
Individual pensions
 
1,606 
 
141 
 
1,747 
 
2,275 
 
185 
 
2,460 
 
(29)
Corporate and other pensions
 
2,750 
 
– 
 
2,750 
 
2,600 
 
– 
 
2,600 
 
Retirement income
 
889 
 
– 
 
889 
 
887 
 
– 
 
887 
 
– 
Managed fund business
 
177 
 
– 
 
177 
 
146 
 
– 
 
146 
 
21 
Life and pensions
 
7,683 
 
512 
 
8,195 
 
9,269 
 
546 
 
9,815 
 
(17)
OEICs
 
2,633 
 
– 
 
2,633 
 
3,704 
 
– 
 
3,704 
 
(29)
Total
 
10,316 
 
512 
 
10,828 
 
12,973 
 
546 
 
13,519 
 
(20)
                             
Analysis by channel
                           
Bancassurance
 
4,432 
 
– 
 
4,432 
 
6,997 
 
– 
 
6,997 
 
(37)
Intermediary
 
5,365 
 
512 
 
5,877 
 
5,639 
 
546 
 
6,185 
 
(5)
Direct
 
519 
 
– 
 
519 
 
337 
 
– 
 
337 
 
54 
Total
 
10,316 
 
512 
 
10,828 
 
12,973 
 
546 
 
13,519 
 
(20)

The present value of new business premiums reduced by 20 per cent, to £10,828 million.  This largely reflects the withdrawal in 2009 of certain HBOS legacy products with lower returns.

In the Bancassurance channel the reduction reflects the removal from sale of an HBOS guaranteed investment plan sold in 2009 and, since the integrated bancassurance proposition was launched in June 2010, a change in mix away from savings products towards more profitable protection business in line with the legacy Lloyds TSB strategy.  Sales of OEICs have been further adversely affected by a reduction in the volume of capital protected products given improved investment markets.  However, sales of protection products have increased by 11 per cent and the aggregate new business margin has increased.

Within the intermediary channel the reduction in volumes primarily reflects the withdrawal of low returning HBOS individual pension products, partly offset by an increase in sales of the on-going Retirement Account pension product and strong sales of corporate pensions.


INSURANCE (continued)

Funds under management
The table below shows the funds of the Life, Pensions and Investment companies within the Insurance division.  These funds are predominantly managed within the Group by the Wealth and International division.

   
2010 
 
2009 
   
£bn 
 
£bn 
         
Opening funds under management
 
122.1 
 
113.7 
         
UK business
       
Premiums
 
11.2 
 
12.2 
Claims and surrenders
 
(14.9)
 
(13.2)
Transfers related to the sale of Insight Investment
 
– 
 
(3.3)
Net outflow of business
 
(3.7)
 
(4.3)
Investment return, expenses and commission
 
10.5 
 
12.3 
Other movements1
 
4.3 
 
– 
Net movement
 
11.1 
 
8.0 
         
European business
       
Net movement
 
0.4 
 
0.6 
         
Dividends and capital repatriation
 
(0.5)
 
(0.2)
         
Closing funds under management
 
133.1 
 
122.1 
         
Managed by the Group
 
109.3 
 
102.4 
Managed by third parties
 
23.8 
 
19.7 
Closing funds under management
 
133.1 
 
122.1 

1
Other movements in funds under management incorporates alignment changes and the inclusion of managed pension funds.


INSURANCE (continued)

   
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
General Insurance
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Home insurance
           
Underwriting income (net of reinsurance)
 
922 
 
897 
 
Commission receivable
 
75 
 
71 
 
Commission payable
 
(135)
 
(94)
 
(44)
   
862 
 
874 
 
(1)
             
Payment protection insurance
           
Underwriting income (net of reinsurance)
 
544 
 
731 
 
(26)
Commission receivable
 
27 
 
13 
   
Commission payable
 
(318)
 
(395)
 
19 
   
253 
 
349 
 
(28)
Other
           
Underwriting income (net of reinsurance)
 
 
 
(25)
Commission receivable
 
50 
 
69 
 
(28)
Commission payable
 
(15)
 
(28)
 
46 
Other (including investment income)
 
(34)
 
(6)
   
   
 
43 
 
(84)
Net operating income
 
1,122 
 
1,266 
 
(11)
Claims paid on insurance contracts (net of reinsurance)
 
(542)
 
(637)
 
15 
Operating income, net of claims
 
580 
 
629 
 
(8)
Operating expenses
 
(208)
 
(262)
 
21 
Profit before tax and fair value unwind
 
372 
 
367 
 
             
Combined ratio
 
79% 
 
83% 
   

Profit before tax and fair value unwind from General Insurance increased by 1 per cent to £372 million, due primarily to improved unemployment claims experience plus integration synergies after taking account of lower income resulting from ceasing to write new  PPI business and freeze related claims.

Underwriting income for home insurance showed modest growth of 3 per cent to £922 million.  Home commission payable was adversely affected by the alignment of commission arrangements between the legacy businesses during the year.

PPI underwriting income decreased by £187 million, or 26 per cent, to £544 million reflecting the continued impact on new business volumes from the market wide move to monthly premiums in 2009 and the Group’s withdrawal from the payment protection market on 23 July 2010.  Changes in commission payable reflect lower volumes of PPI written during the year.

Claims were 15 per cent lower than 2009 at £542 million reflecting lower unemployment claims experience.  The home book has been particularly affected by the freeze events experienced in January and December 2010.  This has been partly offset by the benefits of ongoing claims processing improvements and integration.

Operating expenses decreased by £54 million, or 21 per cent, to £208 million primarily as a result of the alignment of commission arrangements on home insurance, the delivery of integration savings and a continued focus on cost management.

GROUP OPERATIONS

   
2010 
 
20091
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Net interest expense
 
(72)
 
(69)
 
(4)
Other income
 
49 
 
20 
   
Total income
 
(23)
 
(49)
 
53 
             
Direct costs:
           
Information Technology
 
(1,209)
 
(1,254)
 
Operations
 
(628)
 
(672)
 
Property
 
(968)
 
(983)
 
Procurement
 
(56)
 
(57)
 
Support functions
 
(112)
 
(116)
 
   
(2,973)
 
(3,082)
 
Result before recharges to divisions
 
(2,996)
 
(3,131)
 
Total net recharges to divisions
 
2,930 
 
2,957 
 
(1)
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
 
 
   
Loss before tax and fair value unwind
 
(63)
 
(171)
 
63 
Fair value unwind
 
– 
 
22 
   
Loss before tax
 
(63)
 
(149)
 
58 

1
2009 comparative figures have been amended to reflect the effect of centralising operations across the Group as part of the integration programme.  To ensure a fair comparison of 2010 performance, 2009 direct costs have been increased with an equivalent offsetting increase in recharges to divisions.

Financial performance
2010 direct costs decreased by £109 million, or 4 per cent, to £2,973 million reflecting the continued focus on cost management and the delivery of integration synergy savings.

Information Technology costs decreased by 4 per cent, with integration savings offsetting inflationary rises.

Operations costs decreased by 7 per cent, through the continuing rationalisation of our major Operations functions and lower charges in respect of joint ventures.

Group Property costs decreased by 2 per cent, with the continuing consolidation of the heritage property portfolios delivering further integration benefits.

Procurement costs decreased by 2 per cent, reflecting the effect of negotiated lower third party costs on centrally managed contracts.  In addition, Procurement has helped to deliver Group wide synergies.

Support function costs decreased by 3 per cent, primarily driven by the completion of payments filtering investment in 2009.  Underlying support function costs increased largely as a result of further strengthening of the Risk function in line with increasing regulatory requirements.

CENTRAL ITEMS

   
2010 
 
2009 
   
£m 
 
£m 
         
Net interest expense
 
(823)
 
(815)
Other income
 
398 
 
1,780 
Total income
 
(425)
 
965 
Operating expenses
 
(107)
 
(294)
Trading surplus
 
(532)
 
671 
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
 
 
(1)
Profit before tax and fair value unwind
 
(530)
 
670 
Fair value unwind
 
(1,446)
 
(2,119)
Loss before tax
 
(1,976)
 
(1,449)

Central items include income and expenditure not recharged to the divisions, including the costs of certain central and head office functions and the financial impact of hedge ineffectiveness.

Total income decreased by £1,390 million to £(425) million primarily due to a £1,045 million reduction in liability management gains, together with a £193 million increase in the mark-to-market losses arising from the equity conversion feature of the Group's Enhanced Capital Notes and a £131 million reduction in the gain on other derivatives which cannot be mitigated through hedge accounting.

Liability management gains arose on transactions undertaken in both 2009 and 2010 as part of the Group's management of capital which exchanged certain debt securities for ordinary shares or other debt instruments.  These transactions resulted in a gain of £423 million in 2010 compared to a gain of £1,498 million in 2009 (of which £1,468 million is reflected in Central items).  The fair value of the equity conversion feature of the Group’s Enhanced Capital Notes decreased by £620 million in 2010 compared to a decrease of £427 million in 2009.

Net interest expense was broadly unchanged at £823 million, but included higher capital and wholesale liquidity funding costs of £601 million (2009: £260 million) not recovered from the divisions, with the increase primarily due to higher wholesale market funding spreads and the Group's decision to accelerate its wholesale funding in 2010.  This has been offset by improved net interest from interest rate risk management activities compared to 2009.

Operating expenses reduced by £187 million to £107 million due to lower professional fees and other costs associated with capital transactions and projects.

Fair value unwind improved by £673 million to £(1,446) million primarily due to the effect of the liability management transactions leading to a reduced amortisation rate.  Gains on liability management transactions included accelerated fair value amortisations.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON A COMBINED BUSINESSES BASIS

1.         Basis of preparation of combined businesses information

Comparisons of results on a statutory basis are of limited benefit due to a number of factors.  In order to provide more meaningful and relevant comparatives, the results of the Group and divisions are presented on a 'combined businesses' basis.  The key principles adopted in the preparation of the combined businesses basis of reporting are described below.

·  
In order to reflect the impact of the acquisition of HBOS, the following adjustments have been made:
 
 
the 2009 results assume HBOS had been owned throughout the year;
 
 
the gain on acquisition of HBOS (in 2009) and amortisation of purchased intangible assets have been excluded; and
 
 
the unwind of acquisition-related fair value adjustments is shown as one line in the combined businesses income statement.

·  
In order to present better the underlying business performance the following items, not related to acquisition accounting, have also been excluded:
 
 
integration costs;
 
 
insurance and policyholder interests volatility;
 
 
the Government Asset Protection Scheme (GAPS) fee paid in 2009;
 
 
goodwill impairment;
 
 
the curtailment gain in respect of the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes;
 
 
the customer goodwill payments provision; and
 
 
loss on disposal of businesses.
 

1.         Basis of preparation of combined businesses information (continued)

The tables below set out a reconciliation from the published statutory results to the combined businesses results:

       
Removal of:
   
2010
 
Lloyds 
Banking 
Group 
statutory 
Acquisition 
related 
items, including pension  curtailment 
gain1
Volatility 
arising in 
insurance 
businesses 
Insurance 
gross up 
Customer goodwill payments provision and loss  on 
disposal of 
businesses 
Fair value 
unwind 
Combined 
businesses 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
                             
Net interest income
 
12,546 
 
– 
 
26 
 
949 
 
– 
 
301 
 
13,822 
Other income
 
30,921 
 
– 
 
(332)
 
(19,162)
 
– 
 
(1,263)
 
10,164 
Total income
 
43,467 
 
– 
 
(306)
 
(18,213)
 
– 
 
(962)
 
23,986 
Insurance claims
 
(18,511)
 
– 
 
– 
 
17,967 
 
– 
 
 
(542)
Total income, net of insurance claims
 
24,956 
 
– 
 
(306)
 
(246)
 
– 
 
(960)
 
23,444 
Costs:
                           
Operating expenses
 
(13,068)
 
1,320 
 
– 
 
246 
 
500 
 
74 
 
(10,928)
Impairment of tangible fixed assets
 
(202)
 
52 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(150)
   
(13,270)
 
1,372 
 
– 
 
246 
 
500 
 
74 
 
(11,078)
Trading surplus (deficit)
11,686 
 
1,372 
 
(306)
 
– 
 
500 
 
(886)
 
12,366 
Impairment
 
(10,952)
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(2,229)
 
(13,181)
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
(88)
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(3)
 
(91)
Loss on disposal of businesses
 
(365)
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
365 
 
– 
 
– 
Fair value unwind
     
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
3,118 
 
3,118 
Profit (loss) before tax
 
281 
 
1,372 
 
(306)
 
– 
 
865 
 
– 
 
2,212 

1
Comprises the pension curtailment gain (£910 million), integration costs (£1,653 million) and the amortisation of purchased intangibles (£629 million).
                                                        
1.         Basis of preparation of combined businesses information (continued)

           
Removal of:
   
2009
 
Lloyds  Banking  Group 
statutory 
Pre- 
acquisition  results of  HBOS 
GAPS fee  and  acquisition  related 
items1
Volatility 
arising in 
insurance 
businesses 
 
Insurance  gross up 
Fair value  unwind 
Combined 
businesses 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
                             
Net interest income
 
9,026 
 
243 
 
– 
 
11 
 
1,280 
 
2,166 
 
12,726 
Other income
 
36,271 
 
(1,123)
 
– 
 
(479)
 
(21,659)
 
(1,135)
 
11,875 
Total income
 
45,297 
 
(880)
 
– 
 
(468)
 
(20,379)
 
1,031 
 
24,601 
Insurance claims
 
(22,019)
 
1,349 
 
– 
 
– 
 
20,318 
 
(285)
 
(637)
Total income, net of insurance claims
 
23,278 
 
469 
 
– 
 
(468)
 
(61)
 
746 
 
23,964 
Operating expenses
 
(15,984)
 
(293)
 
4,589 
 
– 
 
61 
 
18 
 
(11,609)
Trading surplus (deficit)
7,294 
 
176 
 
4,589 
 
(468)
 
– 
 
764 
 
12,355 
Impairment
 
(16,673)
 
(456)
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(6,859)
 
(23,988)
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
(752)
 
– 
 
– 
 
(10)
 
– 
 
(5)
 
(767)
Gain on acquisition
 
11,173 
 
– 
 
(11,173)
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Fair value unwind
     
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
6,100 
 
6,100 
Profit (loss) before tax
 
1,042 
 
(280)
 
(6,584)
 
(478)
 
– 
 
– 
 
(6,300)

1
Comprises the Government Asset Protection Scheme fee (£2,500 million), integration costs (£1,096 million), amortisation of purchased intangibles (£753 million), goodwill impairment (£240 million) and the gain on acquisition (£11,173 million).


2.         Banking net interest margin
       
2010 
 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Banking net interest margin
           
Banking net interest income
     
13,386 
 
11,953 
             
Average interest-earning assets
     
637,386 
 
674,246 
Average interest-bearing liabilities
     
352,701 
 
347,180 
             
Banking net interest margin
     
2.10% 
 
1.77% 
Banking asset margin
     
1.56% 
 
1.11% 
Banking liability margin
     
0.97% 
 
1.28% 

Banking net interest income is analysed for asset and liability margins based on interest earned and paid on average assets and average liabilities respectively, adjusted for Funds Transfer Pricing, which prices intra-group funding and liquidity.  Centrally held wholesale funding costs and related items are included in the Group banking asset margin.

Average interest-earning assets and average interest-bearing liabilities relate solely to customer and product balances in the banking businesses on which interest is earned or paid.  Funding and capital balances including debt securities in issue, subordinated debt, repurchase agreements and shareholders’ equity are excluded from the calculation of average interest-bearing liabilities.  However, the cost of funding these balances allocated to the banking businesses is included in banking net interest income.

A reconciliation of banking net interest income to Group net interest income which shows the items excluded in determining banking net interest income follows:

       
2010 
 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Banking net interest income – combined businesses
     
13,386 
 
11,953 
Insurance division
     
(263)
 
(287)
Other net interest income (including trading activity)
     
699 
 
1,060 
Group net interest income – combined businesses
     
13,822 
 
12,726 
             
Fair value unwind
     
(301)
 
(2,166)
Insurance gross up
     
(949)
 
(1,280)
Volatility arising in insurance businesses
     
(26)
 
(11)
Pre-acquisition results of HBOS plc
     
– 
 
(243)
Group net interest income – statutory
     
12,546 
 
9,026 


3. Integration costs and benefits

The Group remains on target to deliver annualised cost savings from synergies and other operating efficiencies of £2 billion by the end of 2011.

The sustainable run-rate synergies achieved as at 31 December 2010 totalled £1,379 million excluding a number of one-off savings.  The table below analyses the run-rate synergies as at 31 December 2010 by division and the 2011 target run-rate of £2 billion.

   
2010
 
2011
   
Synergy 
run-rate 
as at 
31 Dec  2010 
£m 
 
Allocation  of Group  Operations  run-rate to  divisions 
£m 
 
Run-rate
by market  facing  division 
£m 
 
Target 
run-rate 
by market 
facing 
division 
£m 
                 
Retail
 
301 
 
228 
 
529 
 
867 
Wholesale
 
248 
 
111 
 
359 
 
532 
Wealth and International
 
233 
 
 
240 
 
242 
Insurance
 
167 
 
30 
 
197 
 
239 
Group Operations
 
393 
 
(393)
 
– 
 
– 
Central items
 
37 
 
17 
 
54 
 
120 
Total
 
1,379 
 
– 
 
1,379 
 
2,000 

Savings to date continue to be driven largely from role reductions resulting from deployment of the new Group organisation design adopting the Lloyds TSB approach.  The overwhelming majority of role reductions have been achieved through re-deployment, natural turnover and voluntary redundancy.  In addition the Group has exited 79 non-branch properties during 2010, bringing the total to 162 since the start of the integration programme.

Procurement benefits in 2010 were also significant at £236 million and supplier negotiations resulted in over 90 per cent of Group expenditure being consolidated within our top 1,000 suppliers.

The software build of the Integrated IT Platform was completed in the first half of 2010 and following extensive testing largely implemented by the end of 2010 and is now live and operational for most Lloyds TSB processes and transactions.  Roll out of the Lloyds TSB counter system across Halifax and Bank of Scotland branches commenced in late 2010 and will complete during the first half of 2011.  Similarly HBOS ATMs are being migrated and the Group’s target mortgage sales platform rolled out to mortgage sales advisers creating a single platform for mortgage sales.

Product and channel systems are being integrated and harmonised where required and this will continue through the first half of 2011 in parallel with a detailed and rigorous programme of testing in preparation for customer data migration from HBOS systems to the single IT platform by the end of 2011.

3. Integration costs and benefits (continued)

Integration activities have continued at pace over 2010 with delivery being wide ranging and spanning Group activities. Examples include the rollout of the Lloyds TSB model of day time cash deliveries to Halifax and Bank of Scotland branches; implementation of an improved online mortgage application process for mortgage brokers; delivery of a single scalable secure Internet Banking platform; launch of an integrated product proposition for our market leading Bancassurance business; migration of Asset Finance Lex customer and Bank of Scotland dealer finance books onto a single platform; and harmonisation of our loss notification and loss adjusting service processes for household insurance within our General Insurance business.

Total cost reductions from synergies of £1,361 million achieved in the year against the integration baseline and in line with target include other operating efficiencies and one-off savings which are excluded from the reported run rate synergies.  The total cost reductions relate primarily to reductions in colleague numbers, procurement and IT savings.

One-off integration costs of £1,653 million were incurred in 2010 which have been excluded from the combined businesses results.  This brings the total integration costs since the HBOS acquisition to £2,749 million.  The integration costs relate to severance, IT and business costs of implementation.  The severance provisions are for 26,000 role reductions announced to the end of 2010 of which 22,000 have been achieved to date.


4.
Impairment charge
   
2010 
 
2009 
   
£m 
 
£m 
Retail:
       
Secured
 
292 
 
789 
Unsecured
 
2,455 
 
3,432 
Total Retail
 
2,747 
 
4,221 
Wholesale
 
4,226 
 
14,031 
Wealth and International
 
5,985 
 
4,058 
Impairment charge on loans and advances to customers
 
12,958 
 
22,310 
Loans and advances to banks
 
(13)
 
(3)
Debt securities classified as loans and receivables
 
57 
 
992 
Available-for-sale financial assets
 
115 
 
646 
Other credit risk provisions
 
64 
 
43 
Total impairment charge
 
13,181 
 
23,988 
         
Impairment charge on loans and advances to customers as
% of average lending:
       
Retail:
       
Secured
 
0.09% 
 
0.23% 
Unsecured
 
8.11% 
 
9.94% 
Total Retail
 
0.74% 
 
1.11% 
Wholesale
 
2.08% 
 
5.92% 
Wealth and International
 
8.90% 
 
6.04% 
Total
 
2.01% 
 
3.25% 


5.         Core and non-core business

Non-core portfolios consist of non-relationship assets and liabilities together with assets and liabilities which are outside the Group's current appetite.  An analysis of non-core assets and liabilities and the associated income and impairment charge is shown in the table below.

   
Underlying 
income1
Impairment 
charge 
Loans and 
advances to 
customers 
 
Risk  weighted 
assets 
 
Customer 
deposits 
2010
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
                     
Core portfolios
                   
Retail
 
10,394 
 
(2,623)
 
333.1 
 
98.1 
 
235.6 
Wholesale
 
5,540 
 
(1,276)
 
102.0 
 
127.9 
 
119.4 
Wealth and International
 
1,679 
 
(221)
 
18.1 
 
23.7 
 
32.5 
Insurance
 
2,009 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Group Operations & Central items
(251)
 
– 
 
0.4 
 
15.7 
 
0.9 
   
19,371 
 
(4,120)
 
453.6 
 
265.4 
 
388.4 
Non-core portfolios
                   
Retail
 
591 
 
(124)
 
30.6 
 
11.2 
 
– 
Wholesale
 
3,022 
 
(3,170)
 
71.2 
 
94.8 
 
4.9 
Wealth and International
 
657 
 
(5,767)
 
37.2 
 
35.0 
 
0.3 
   
4,270 
 
(9,061)
 
139.0 
 
141.0 
 
5.2 
Total Group
 
23,641 
 
(13,181)
 
592.6 
 
406.4 
 
393.6 

   
 
 
 
 
Core portfolios
 
82 
 
31 
 
77 
 
65 
 
99 
Non-core portfolios
 
18 
 
69 
 
23 
 
35 
 
Total Group
 
100 
 
100 
 
100 
 
100 
 
100 

2009
                   
Core portfolios
                   
Retail
 
9,386 
 
(3,974)
 
337.6 
 
115.4 
 
224.1 
Wholesale
 
5,336 
 
(2,187)
 
108.7 
 
150.6 
 
148.5 
Wealth and International
 
1,601 
 
(189)
 
19.2 
 
23.1 
 
25.3 
Insurance
 
1,990 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Group Operations & Central items
(125)
 
– 
 
0.6 
 
15.5 
 
0.2 
   
18,188 
 
(6,350)
 
466.1 
 
304.6 
 
398.1 
Non-core portfolios
                   
Retail
 
388 
 
(253)
 
33.5 
 
13.2 
 
– 
Wholesale
 
3,573 
 
(13,496)
 
83.1 
 
135.4 
 
4.9 
Wealth and International
 
744 
 
(3,889)
 
44.3 
 
40.1 
 
3.7 
   
4,705 
 
(17,638)
 
160.9 
 
188.7 
 
8.6 
Total Group
 
22,893 
 
(23,988)
 
627.0 
 
493.3 
 
406.7 

   
 
 
 
 
Core portfolios
 
79 
 
26 
 
74 
 
62 
 
98 
Non-core portfolios
 
21 
 
74 
 
26 
 
38 
 
Total Group
 
100 
 
100 
 
100 
 
100 
 
100 

1
Net of insurance claims.  Excluding liability management gains and the reduction in the fair value of the equity conversion feature of the Group’s Enhanced Capital Notes.


5.
Core and non-core business (continued)

Non-core assets
Non-core portfolios primarily comprise loans and advances to customers.  However, certain portfolios of debt securities, available for sale financial assets and other assets in Wholesale are also considered to be non-core.  The Group's total non-core assets are shown in the table below.

   
As at  31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at  31 Dec 
20091
 
Change 
Non-core assets
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
             
Loans and advances to customers
 
139.0 
 
160.9 
 
(14)
Debt securities
 
25.4 
 
31.5 
 
(19)
Available for sale financial assets
 
22.2 
 
32.0 
 
(31)
Other assets
 
8.1 
 
11.7 
 
(31)
Total non-core assets
 
194.7 
 
236.1 
 
(18)

1
Total non-core assets at 31 December 2009 have been reduced by £3.9 billion from the previously presented figure of £240 billion following a reclassification between core and non-core.


6.         Volatility arising in insurance businesses

The Group's statutory profit before tax is affected by insurance volatility, caused by movements in financial markets, and policyholder interests volatility, which primarily reflects the gross up of policyholder tax included in the Group tax charge.

During 2010, the Group's statutory profit before tax included positive insurance and policyholder interests volatility of £306 million compared to positive volatility of £478 million in 2009 primarily reflecting the more significant improvements in financial markets in 2009.  The volatility in 2010 reflects the strong performance of equity markets, partially offset by lower than expected returns on cash and fixed interest assets.

Volatility comprises the following:
       
2010 
 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Insurance volatility
     
100 
 
237 
Policyholder interests volatility1
     
216 
 
298 
Total volatility
     
316 
 
535 
Insurance hedging arrangements
     
(10)
 
(57)
Total
     
306 
 
478 

1
Includes volatility relating to the Group’s interest in St James’s Place.


6.         Volatility arising in insurance businesses (continued)

Insurance volatility
The Group’s insurance businesses have liability products that are supported by substantial holdings of investments, including equities, property and fixed interest investments, all of which are subject to variations in their value.  The value of the liabilities does not move exactly in line with changes in the value of the investments, yet IFRS requires that the changes in both the value of the liabilities and investments be reflected within the income statement.  As these investments are substantial and movements in their value can have a significant impact on the profitability of the Group, management believes that it is appropriate to disclose the division’s results on the basis of an expected return in addition to results based on the actual return.

The expected sterling investment returns used to determine the normalised profit of the business, which are based on prevailing market rates and published research into historical investment return differentials, are set out below:

United Kingdom (Sterling)
 
2011 
 
2010 
 
2009 
   
 
 
             
Gilt yields (gross)
 
3.99 
 
4.45 
 
3.74 
Equity returns (gross)
 
6.99 
 
7.45 
 
6.74 
Dividend yield
 
3.00 
 
3.00 
 
3.00 
Property return (gross)
 
6.99 
 
7.45 
 
6.74 
Corporate bonds in unit-linked and with-profit funds (gross)
 
4.59 
 
5.05 
 
4.34 
Fixed interest investments backing annuity liabilities (gross)
 
4.78 
 
5.30 
 
5.72 

The impact on the results due to the actual return on these investments differing from the expected return (based upon economic assumptions made at the beginning of the year) is included within insurance volatility.  Changes in market variables also affect the realistic valuation of the guarantees and options embedded within the With Profits Funds, the value of the in-force business and the value of shareholders’ funds.

The Insurance division experienced positive volatility of £100 million during 2010. This was primarily driven by strong performance on equity and property investments relative to the expected return.  During 2010, equity market values increased by 9 per cent and property returns reached 19 per cent.  Partly offsetting this was lower than expected returns on cash and fixed interest assets.  This benefit is lower than the £237 million positive volatility reported in 2009, as 2009 included significant benefits from reductions in corporate bond spreads, which did not occur in 2010, and greater out-performance of equity markets.

Group hedging arrangements
To protect against further deterioration in equity market conditions, and the consequent negative impact on the value of in-force business on the Group balance sheet, the Group purchased put option contracts in 2009.  These expired in January 2010.  The charge for this option was £7 million.  New protection against significant market falls, using option contracts, was acquired by the Group, financed by selling some upside potential from equity market movements.  There was no initial cost associated with these hedging arrangements. On a mark-to-market valuation basis a loss of £3 million was recognised in relation to these contracts in 2010.  The 2010 option contracts were replaced by the Group in January 2011 with fresh contracts to provide further protection against significant market falls. Again this was financed, at no initial cost, by selling some upside potential from equity market movements.


6.         Volatility arising in insurance businesses (continued)

Policyholder interests volatility
The application of accounting standards results in the introduction of other sources of significant volatility into the pre-tax profits of the life, pensions and investments business.  In order to provide a clearer representation of the performance of the business, and consistent with the way in which it is managed, adjustments are made to remove this volatility from underlying profits.  The effect of these adjustments is separately disclosed as policyholder interests volatility; there is no impact upon profit attributable to equity shareholders over the long term.

The most significant of these additional sources of volatility is policyholder tax.  Accounting standards require that tax on policyholder investment returns should be included in the Group’s tax charge rather than being offset against the related income.  The impact is, therefore, to either increase or decrease profit before tax with a corresponding change in the tax charge.  Over the longer term the charges levied to policyholders to cover policyholder tax on investment returns and the related tax provisions are expected to offset.  In practice timing and measurement differences exist between provisions for tax and charges made to policyholders.  Consistent with the normalised approach taken in respect of insurance volatility, differences in the expected levels of the policyholder tax provision and policyholder charges are adjusted through policyholder interests volatility.  Other sources of volatility include the minorities’ share of the profits earned by investment vehicles which are not wholly owned by the long-term assurance funds.

During the year ended 31 December 2010, the statutory profit before tax in both the Insurance and Wealth and International divisions included credits to other income which relate to the policyholder interests volatility charge of £216 million (2009: policyholder interests volatility charge of £298 million).  Strong market conditions in the latter part of 2010 resulted in increased policyholder tax liabilities and led to a policyholder tax charge of £315 million (2009: £410 million) for the year in the Group’s tax charge.


7.
Number of employees (full-time equivalent)
   
2010 
 
2009 
         
Retail
 
54,235 
 
53,338 
Wholesale
 
18,103 
 
18,496 
Wealth and International
 
8,348 
 
10,503 
Insurance
 
9,767 
 
10,621 
Group Operations
 
18,074 
 
19,047 
Central functions
 
2,871 
 
2,391 
   
111,398 
 
114,396 
Agency staff (full-time equivalent)
 
(7,168)
 
(7,252)
Total number of employees (full-time equivalent)
 
104,230 
 
107,144 


RISK MANAGEMENT

 
Page 
Risk management approach
74 
Principal risks and uncertainties
75 
Economy
75 
Liquidity and funding
77 
Credit risk
83 
Market risk
101 
Insurance risk
101 
Legal and regulatory
102 
Customer treatment
103 
People
103 
Integration
103 
State funding and state aid
104 

 
The income statement numbers in this section have been presented on a combined businesses basis.


 
RISK MANAGEMENT APPROACH

The Group’s approach to risk is founded on robust corporate governance practices and a risk management culture which guides the way all employees approach their work, the way they behave and the decisions they make.  The board takes the lead by establishing the ‘tone at the top’ and approving professional standards and corporate values for itself, senior management and other colleagues.  The board ensures that senior management implements strategic policies and procedures designed to promote professional behaviour and integrity.  The board also ensures that senior management implements risk policies and risk appetites that either limit, or where appropriate, prohibit activities, relationships, and situations that could diminish the quality of corporate governance.  All colleagues including the group chief executive are assessed against a balanced scorecard that explicitly includes their risk performance as one component of overall performance.

This board-level engagement, coupled with the direct involvement of senior management in group-wide risk issues at group executive committee level, ensures that issues are escalated on a timely basis and appropriate remediation plans are initiated.  The interaction of the executive and non-executive governance structures relies upon a culture of transparency and openness that is encouraged by senior management.  Key decisions are always taken by more than one person.

The Group uses an enterprise-wide risk management framework for the identification, assessment, measurement and management of risk.  It seeks to maximise value for shareholders over time by aligning risk management with the corporate strategy, assessing the impact of emerging risks from legislation, new technologies or the market, and developing risk tolerances and mitigating strategies.  The framework seeks to: strengthen the Group’s ability to identify and assess risks, aggregate group-wide risks and define the corporate risk appetite, develop solutions for reducing or transferring risk, and where appropriate, exploit risks to gain competitive advantage, thereby seeking to increase shareholder value.

The Group has a conservative business model embodied by a risk culture founded on prudence and accountability, where everyone understands that they are accountable for the risks they take and that the needs of customers are paramount.  The focus has been and remains on building and sustaining long-term relationships with customers, through good and bad economic times.  The approach is supported by a ‘through the cycle’ approach to risk with strong control and monitoring.

The group business risk committee and the group asset and liability committee are chaired by the group chief executive and include all members of the group executive committee.  The aggregate group wide risk profile and portfolio appetite are discussed at these monthly meetings.  The board risk committee, chaired by a non-executive director, comprises other non-executive directors and oversees the Group’s risk exposures.  This second-line-of-defence committee is supported by the chief risk officer, who is independent of the front line business units, is a full member of the group executive committee and reports to the group chief executive.  The chief risk officer regularly informs the board risk committee of the aggregate risk profile and has direct access to the chair and members of the board risk committee.


PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES

Economy
The global economy has continued to recover from the deep recession of 2009, but the recovery is fairly weak by past standards and its continuation is not assured.  Remaining vulnerabilities in the sustainability of public finances and the robustness of banking sectors across the US and Europe have meant that growth there has faltered during 2010 and required monetary policy to be kept highly accommodative for longer than expected at the start of the year. Ireland has required support from the IMF and EU, and other high deficit countries in the Eurozone may do so during 2011.  The US has extended the Bush-era tax cuts, although it is unclear how much stimulus this will provide given the obvious need to tighten fiscal policy significantly in the medium term.  Asia has been growing more strongly, less affected by high levels of private and public sector debt and other strains in its financial system, helping a recovery in exports from competitive European countries and commodity producers.  However, inflation in emerging markets has been rising above desired levels, necessitating increased interest rates, and their economic growth is moderating as a result.

The UK economy grew by 1.4 per cent in 2010, below the long term average of 2.25 per cent. Growth peaked in the first half due to the initial boost from companies beginning to rebuild stocks, and slowed during the second half, with an outright fall in GDP in the fourth quarter.  Consumer confidence has fallen back and house prices have reversed some of their 2009 rise since the third quarter of 2010 and finished the year only slightly lower than at the end of 2009.  Nevertheless, some key drivers of the Group’s performance continued to perform better than expected.  In particular, UK corporate liquidations have been on a falling trend since the third quarter of 2009, improving much earlier than in previous recoveries, and are now almost back to the level at the start of the recession.  Related to that, employment has held up relatively well, falling by much less than in previous recessions and beginning to rise much earlier.  Commercial property prices have now risen by 16 per cent from the trough reached in July 2009 and even though house price rises have fallen back slightly, average prices are still 6 per cent above their trough of April 2009.

The Group’s central scenario is for the modest recovery in the UK to continue – the projection of 1.9 per cent GDP growth in 2011 and 2.4 per cent in 2012 is close to consensus and slightly below the November 2010 forecasts from the Office for Budget Responsibility.  Private and public sector deleveraging, which is expected to suppress economic growth, should be more than offset by a positive contribution from net external trade (reflecting the weakness of sterling), by further rebuilding of stocks by companies and by increased investment.  Public spending cuts may increase unemployment slightly in 2011, but if the economy continues to grow, the private sector should be able to more than offset that impact from 2012.  Corporate insolvencies have already begun to fall as the economy recovers, although further declines will be very slow, limited by the public spending cuts and the weakness of consumer spending. House prices are expected to end 2011 down by 2 per cent on end 2010, and then rise slowly.  Commercial property prices are also expected to fall by 2 per cent during 2011, before rising slowly.  The US recovery is assumed to continue in 2011, and in the Eurozone there is expected to be a wide divergence in 2011 between recovery in the stronger low-deficit countries and the higher deficit countries that will struggle to grow at all. The Irish economy, to which we have exposure, is expected to grow by just 0.5 per cent in 2011. Irish house prices are expected to fall by a further 5 per cent in 2011 before flattening in 2012; commercial property prices are expected to be flat over 2011 and 2012.

Economy (continued)

The risks around this scenario remain skewed to the downside.  Business and consumer confidence remains fragile, and the extent to which simultaneous fiscal tightening across Europe might undermine global and UK growth is unclear.  Contagion from the Irish bail-out to other Eurozone economies could drive further fiscal tightening and worsen the outlook further. Rising commodity prices driven by strong recovery in Asia might fuel a further increase in inflation in the West, prompting short-term interest rates to rise more quickly than anticipated.  Since any shock to growth would also worsen the outlook for both public finances and bank capital and funding, a relatively small initial shock could throw economies onto a much weaker path as governments are forced to tighten fiscal policy even further or financial institutions are constrained in their ability to lend.  A ‘double-dip’ scenario – a second recession following closely the one from which the economy is just emerging – would result in further significant increases in corporate failures and unemployment during 2011-12. In addition, residential and commercial property would suffer a second period of falling prices, tenant defaults would increase and central banks would have limited ability to cushion the downturn.

Liquidity and funding

During 2010 liquidity and funding remained a key area of focus for the Group and the industry as a whole.  Like all major banks, the Group is dependent on confidence in the short and longer term wholesale funding markets; should the Group, due to exceptional circumstances, be unable to continue to source sustainable funding and liquidity where necessary, its ability to fund its financial obligations could be affected.

The Group is reliant on both wholesale funding markets and the legacy Government and central bank facilities to support its balance sheet.  The liquidity and funding challenges facing the Group over the medium term continue to be ensuring sustainable access to wholesale funding markets, and the repayment of Government and central bank facilities.  The combination of a clear focus on right-sizing the balance sheet, continued development of the Group’s customer deposit base, and strategic access to the capital markets will enable the Group to strengthen its funding base while reducing its overall wholesale funding requirement.

The key dependencies on successfully funding the Group’s balance sheet include the continued functioning of the money and capital markets; successful right-sizing of the Group’s balance sheet; the repayment of Government and Central Bank facilities in accordance with the agreed terms; no more than limited further deterioration in the UK’s and the Group’s credit rating; and no significant or sudden withdrawal of deposits resulting in increased reliance on wholesale funding markets.  Additionally, the Group has entered into a number of EU state aid related obligations to achieve reductions in certain parts of its balance sheet by the end of 2014.  The requirement to meet this deadline may result in the Group having to provide funding to support these asset reductions and/or disposals and may also result in a lower price being achieved.

During 2010, the Group further improved the diversification of funding supporting its balance sheet.  Wholesale funding reduced by £27.5 billion whilst customer deposits increased by £11.3 billion, resulting in a more stable liability base.  The customer loan to deposit ratio improved to 154 per cent compared with 169 per cent at 31 December 2009.

At 31 December 2010, the Group’s overall support from legacy Government and central bank facilities totalled £96.6 billion, a reduction of £60.6 billion compared with 31 December 2009.  These facilities have various maturity dates, the last of which is in the fourth quarter of 2012.  The Group’s plan to right size the balance sheet is expected to avoid the necessity to refinance much of this.  Repayment of the remaining amount will be achieved by a combination of customer deposit growth and term wholesale issuance.


       
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
       
£bn 
 
£bn 
             
Credit Guarantee scheme
     
45.4 
 
50.0 
Other
     
51.2 
 
107.2 
Total Government and central bank facilities
     
96.6 
 
157.2 


Liquidity and funding (continued)

The Group’s wholesale term funding ratio (wholesale funding with a remaining life of over one year as a percentage of total funding) at 31 December 2010 has been maintained at 50 per cent.

Despite the market disruption as a result of European sovereign risk concerns during 2010, the Group outperformed its term wholesale issuance plans, allowing an accelerated repayment of Government and central bank facilities and thus reducing the on-going reliance on short term funding.  The Group continued to fund itself successfully in the short term money markets, extending the maturity profile of this source of funding.  The Group anticipates that wholesale markets will remain vulnerable to periods of disruption during 2011.  To mitigate the impact of such events, the Group has been actively diversifying its funding sources and investor base.

In June 2010, the FSA introduced a new liquidity framework (Individual Liquidity Adequacy Standards – ILAS) bringing in enhanced systems and controls, quantitative requirements, reporting requirements and stress testing.  As part of the ILAS framework, the FSA has issued an Individual Liquidity Guidance (ILG) to the Group, representing a new regulatory requirement, which was effective from 1 June 2010.  The Group has maintained its liquidity levels above the ILG regulatory minimum since inception.

Late in 2010, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision refined the details of the Basel III reforms to ensure the strengthening of global liquidity standards.  This supplemented the 2008 published Principles of Sound Liquidity Risk Management and Supervision ('Sound Principles').  These principles have been strengthened by the development of two principal liquidity measures.

The first measure promotes short term resilience of the liquidity profile by ensuring that banks have sufficient high quality liquid assets to meet potential funding outflows in a stressed environment within a one-month period.  This is measured by the Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR).  The second promotes resilience over a longer time horizon by requiring for banks to fund their activities with a more stable source of funding on a going concern basis.  This is measured by the Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR) which has a time horizon of one year and has been developed to ensure a sustainable maturity structure of assets and liabilities.

The Group welcomes the Basel Committee's Sound Principles.  The introduction of the LCR (January 2015) and NSFR (January 2018) will raise the resilience of banks to potential liquidity shocks and provide the basis for a harmonised approach to liquidity risk management.  At 31 December 2010, the Group's internal calculation of the LCR was 71 per cent and the NSFR was 88 per cent; the guidance issued by the Basel Committee is still subject to final ratification by the EU and the methodology is likely to be refined on the basis of feedback from banks and regulators during the observation period. The actions already announced to right size the balance sheet are expected to ensure compliance with the future minimum standards, which are expected to be 100 per cent for both ratios by their respective effective dates.


Liquidity and funding (continued)

Group funding position
   
As at 
31 Dec  2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
             
Funding Requirement
           
Loans and advances to customers1
 
589.5 
 
625.9 
 
(6)
Loans and advances to banks2
 
10.5 
 
16.1 
 
(35)
Debt securities
 
25.7 
 
32.7 
 
(21)
Available-for-sale financial assets – secondary3
 
25.7 
 
37.7 
 
(32)
Cash balances4
 
3.6 
 
2.7 
 
33 
Funded assets
 
655.0 
 
715.1 
 
(8)
On balance sheet primary liquidity assets5
           
Reverse repurchase agreements
 
7.3 
 
5.3 
 
38 
Balances at central banks – primary4
 
34.5 
 
36.3 
 
(5)
Available-for-sale financial assets – primary
 
17.3 
 
8.9 
 
94 
Held to maturity
 
7.9 
 
– 
   
   
67.0 
 
50.5 
 
33 
Other assets6
 
269.6 
 
261.7 
 
Total Group assets
 
991.6 
 
1,027.3 
 
(3)
Less: Other liabilities6
 
(229.1)
 
(223.4)
 
Funding requirement
 
762.5 
 
803.9 
 
(5)
             
Funded by
           
Customer deposits7
 
382.5 
 
371.2 
 
Wholesale funding
 
298.0 
 
325.5 
 
(8)
Repurchase agreements
 
35.1 
 
63.1 
 
(44)
Total equity
 
46.9 
 
44.1 
 
Total funding
 
762.5 
 
803.9 
 
(5)

1
Excludes £3.1 billion (31 December 2009: £1.1 billion) of reverse repurchase agreements.
2
Excludes £15.6 billion (31 December 2009: £15.1 billion) of loans and advances to banks within the insurance businesses and £4.2 billion (31 December 2009: £4.2 billion) of reverse repurchase agreements.
3
Secondary liquidity assets comprise a diversified pool of highly rated unencumbered collateral (including retained issuance).
4
Cash balances and Balances at central banks – primary are combined in the Group's balance sheet.
5
Primary liquidity assets are FSA eligible liquid assets including UK Gilts, US Treasuries, Euro AAA government debt and unencumbered cash balances held at central banks.
6
Other assets and other liabilities primarily include balances in the Group's insurance businesses and the fair value of derivative assets and liabilities.
7
Excluding repurchase agreements of £11.1 billion (31 December 2009: £35.5 billion).

 
Liquidity and funding (continued)

Group funding by type
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
   
£bn 
 
 
£bn 
 
                 
Deposits from banks1
 
26.4 
 
3.9 
 
48.6 
 
7.0 
Debt securities in issue:1
               
Certificates of deposit
 
42.4 
 
6.2
 
50.9 
 
7.3 
Commercial paper
 
32.5 
 
4.8
 
35.0 
 
5.0 
Medium-term notes2
 
87.7 
 
12.9
 
89.7 
 
12.9 
Covered bonds
 
32.1 
 
4.7
 
28.1 
 
4.0 
Securitisation
 
39.0 
 
5.7
 
35.8 
 
5.1 
   
233.7 
 
34.3
 
239.5 
 
34.3 
                 
Subordinated liabilities1
 
37.9 
 
5.6
 
37.4 
 
5.4 
Total wholesale funding3
 
298.0 
 
43.8 
 
325.5 
 
46.7 
Customer deposits
 
382.5 
 
56.2 
 
371.2 
 
53.3 
Total Group funding4
 
680.5 
 
100.0 
 
696.7 
 
100.0 

1
A reconciliation to the Group’s balance sheet is provided on page 82.
2
Medium term notes include £45.4 billion of funding from the Credit Guarantee scheme.
3
The Group’s definition of wholesale funding aligns with that used by other international market participants; including interbank deposits, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities.
4
Excluding repos and total equity.


Total wholesale funding is analysed by residual maturity as follows:

   
As at 
31 Dec  2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
   
£bn 
 
 
£bn 
 
                 
Less than one year
 
148.6 
 
49.9
 
161.8 
 
49.7 
One to two years
 
46.8 
 
15.7
 
48.8 
 
15.0 
Two to five years
 
52.3 
 
17.6
 
68.7 
 
21.1 
More than five years
 
50.3 
 
16.8
 
46.2 
 
14.2 
Total wholesale funding
 
298.0 
 
100.0
 
325.5 
 
100.0 


Liquidity and funding (continued)

Term issuance
The stabilisation of the term wholesale markets observed in the first quarter of 2010 and the continued functioning of these markets throughout the year, despite European Sovereign credit concerns, enabled the Group to outperform its term issuance plan for 2010.  The Group has taken advantage of the improved market sentiment by successfully accessing a number of markets, both secured and unsecured.  The table below summarises the Group’s term issuance during 2010. Exceeding term funding plans in 2010 contributed to the acceleration in repaying government and central bank facilities during the year.

   
Sterling 
 
US Dollar 
 
Euro 
Other 
currencies 
Total 
 
   
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
                     
Securitisation
 
3.5 
 
5.2 
 
2.1 
 
0.7 
 
11.5 
Medium-term notes
 
1.1 
 
3.7 
 
2.7 
 
2.2 
 
9.7 
Covered bonds
 
– 
 
– 
 
3.7 
 
– 
 
3.7 
Subordinated liabilities
 
0.7 
 
2.5 
 
1.3 
 
– 
 
4.5 
Private placements¹
 
4.6 
 
4.6 
 
10.6 
 
0.8 
 
20.6 
Total Issuance
 
9.9 
 
16.0 
 
20.4 
 
3.7 
 
50.0 

1
Private placements include structured bonds and term repurchase agreements (repos).


Liquidity portfolio
The table below illustrates the Group’s holding of highly liquid unencumbered assets, which are both on and off balance sheet.  This liquidity is available for deployment at immediate notice, subject to complying with regulatory requirements, and is a key component of the Group’s liquidity management process.

 
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
   
£bn 
 
£bn 
         
Primary liquidity1
 
97.5 
 
88.4 
Secondary liquidity2
 
62.4 
 
62.4 
Total
 
159.9 
 
150.8 

1
Primary liquidity is defined as FSA eligible liquid assets (UK Gilts, US Treasuries, Euro AAA government debt; unencumbered cash balances held at central banks).
2
Secondary liquidity comprises a diversified pool of highly rated unencumbered collateral (including retained issuance).

Following the introduction of the FSA’s Individual Liquidity Guidance under ILAS, the Group now manages its liquidity position as a coverage ratio (proportion of stressed outflows covered by primary liquid assets) rather than by reference to a quantum of liquid assets; the liquidity position reflects a buffer over the regulatory minimum.  The Group receives no recognition under ILAS for assets held for secondary liquidity purposes.
 
Liquidity and funding (continued)
 
The following tables reconcile figures reported on page 80.
 

     
As at 31 December 2010
 
Included in 
funding 
analysis 
(above) 
Repos 
Fair value 
and other 
accounting 
methods 
 
Balance 
sheet 
   
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
 
£bn 
                 
Deposits from banks
 
26.4 
 
24.0 
 
– 
 
50.4 
Debt securities in issue
 
233.7 
 
– 
 
(4.8)
 
228.9 
Subordinated liabilities
 
37.9 
 
– 
 
(1.7)
 
36.2 
Total wholesale funding
 
298.0 
 
24.0 
       
Customer deposits
 
382.5 
 
11.1 
 
– 
 
393.6 
Total
 
680.5 
 
35.1 
       

           
As at 31 December 2009
   
Included in 
funding 
analysis 
(above) 
 
Repos 
 
Fair value 
and other 
accounting 
methods 
 
Balance 
sheet 
Deposits from banks
 
48.6 
 
27.6 
 
6.3 
 
82.5 
Debt securities in issue
 
239.5 
 
– 
 
(6.0)
 
233.5 
Subordinated liabilities
 
37.4 
 
– 
 
(2.7)
 
34.7 
Total wholesale funding
 
325.5 
 
27.6 
       
Customer deposits
 
371.2 
 
35.5 
     
406.7 
Total
 
696.7 
 
63.1 
       


Credit risk – Group

As at 31 December 2010
 
Loans and 
advances 
to 
customers 
 
Impaired  loans 
 
Impaired 
loans 
as a % of  closing 
advances 
Impairment  provisions1
Impairment 
provisions 
as a % of  impaired 
loans 
 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
 
£m 
 
 
                     
Retail
 
368,981 
 
9,750 
 
2.6 
 
3,096 
 
31.8 
Wholesale
 
187,651 
 
34,514 
 
18.4 
 
15,855 
 
45.9 
Wealth and International
 
66,368 
 
20,342 
 
30.7 
 
10,684 
 
52.5 
Hedging and other items
 
3,378 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
   
626,378 
 
64,606 
 
10.3 
 
29,635 
 
45.9 
Impairment provisions
 
(29,635)
               
Fair value adjustments
 
(4,146)
               
Total Group
 
592,597 
               
                     
As at 31 December 2009
                   
Retail
 
378,005 
 
11,015 
 
2.9 
 
3,806 
 
34.6 
Wholesale
 
210,934 
 
35,114 
 
16.6 
 
17,179 
 
48.9 
Wealth and International
 
69,402 
 
12,704 
 
18.3 
 
5,003 
 
39.4 
Hedging and other items
 
1,663 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
   
660,004 
 
58,833 
 
8.9 
 
25,988 
 
44.2 
Impairment provisions
 
(25,988)
               
Fair value adjustments
 
(7,047)
               
Total Group
 
626,969 
               

1
Impairment provisions include collective unimpaired provisions.


Impairment charge
   
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Retail
 
2,747 
 
4,227 
 
35 
Wholesale
 
4,446 
 
15,683 
 
72 
Wealth and International
 
5,988 
 
4,078 
 
(47)
Total impairment charge
 
13,181 
 
23,988 
 
45 

European sovereign exposures
As at 31 December 2010, the Group had, in aggregate, minimal direct exposure to the national and local governments of Portugal, Ireland, Italy, Greece and Spain.


 
Credit risk – Group (continued)

Overview
 
·  
The Group achieved a significant reduction in the impairment charge in 2010 to £13,181 million (from £23,988 million in 2009), due to the stabilisation of the wholesale portfolios and good retail affordability and performance.  Improvements in Wholesale and Retail more than offset increased impairment charges in Ireland and Australia, caused by difficult market conditions.
 
·  
Prudent, ‘through the cycle’ credit policies and procedures are in place throughout the Group, focusing on development of enduring client relationships.  This resulted in higher quality new business being originated across the UK.  Very little new origination took place outside the UK.
 
·  
The Group’s level of impairment is being managed successfully in the current challenging economic environment by the Wholesale business support units and Retail collection and recovery units.  The business support model has been expanded from Wholesale across Wealth and International division, with a central team established to manage its business support activity globally.  The Group has also strengthened resources within Retail collections and recoveries to enable more timely engagement with customers experiencing difficulties to drive more effective customer outcomes.
 
·  
The Group actively reduced limits to Portugal, Ireland, Italy, Greece and Spain over the last two years, with the associated country risk profile modest in the context of the Group’s asset base.  Except for Ireland, the 2011 base case impairment forecast for these countries is de-minimis in the context of the Group.
 
·  
The closure of our Bank of Scotland (Ireland) Limited business was completed on the 31 December 2010 and a new operating structure came into existence, focused on intensive management of the closed book to optimise the winding up of our lending.

Outlook – Group
Based on its latest economic assumptions, as set out on page 75, the Group expects an improved impairment charge in 2011 compared with 2010.

While the second half of 2010 has seen most countries exiting from recession, forecasts are that the UK recovery will continue to be at a modest pace and is likely to be protracted.  The risks to the impairment charge remain skewed to the downside across all lending businesses.  In the UK, business and consumer confidence remain fragile and the extent to which simultaneous fiscal tightening might undermine global and UK growth is unclear.  Contagion from the Irish bail-out to other Eurozone economies could drive further fiscal tightening and worsen the outlook further.  Rising commodity prices driven by strong recovery in Asia might fuel a further increase in inflation, prompting short-term interest rates to rise more quickly than anticipated. Potential interest rate rises, public spending cuts and reduced consumer spending could cause cash flow stress and higher levels of default amongst mid-market corporates and Commercial customers, in particular.  In addition, in our commercial real estate book, any deterioration in the economy could increase the level of tenant defaults and reduce capital values further from an already depressed level, particularly in the regions. Further significant falls in house prices, real disposable household income or increasing interest rates, would result in a higher secured retail impairment charge relative to current expectations.

A ‘double-dip’ scenario – a second recession following closely the one from which the economy is just emerging – remains a key downside risk to UK impairment charges.  This is because it would result in further significant increases in corporate failures and unemployment during 2011-12, as well as causing a second period of falling prices for residential and commercial property, tenant defaults would increase and central banks would have limited ability to cushion the downturn.  Together, these factors could lead to increased impairments across the Group’s UK portfolios.

The Group’s exposure to Ireland and Australia is being closely managed.  In post bail-out Ireland, the fragility of the economy and political system could cause further credit quality deterioration within our closed book.  Australia, while benefiting from a commodities export boom, continues to be affected by deteriorating property markets in the geographic areas and property classes where the Group is exposed.  Base rate increases are an additional threat to affordability in our Australian property and acquisition finance books.
Credit risk – Retail
As at 31 December 2010
Loans and 
advances to 
customers 
 
Impaired 
loans 
 
Impaired 
loans as 
a % of 
closing  loans and 
advances 
Impairment 
provisions1
 
Impairment 
provisions 
as a % of 
impaired 
loans 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
 
£m 
 
                     
Secured
 
341,069 
 
6,769 
 
2.0 
 
1,589 
 
23.5 
Unsecured
 
27,912 
 
2,981 
 
10.7 
 
1,507 
 
50.6 
Total gross lending
 
368,981 
 
9,750 
 
2.6 
 
3,096 
 
31.8 
Impairment provisions
 
(3,096)
               
Fair value adjustments
 
(2,154)
               
Total Retail
 
363,731 
               
                     
As at 31 December 2009
                   
Secured
 
345,900 
 
7,196 
 
2.1 
 
1,693 
 
23.5 
Unsecured
 
32,105 
 
3,819 
 
11.9 
 
2,113 
 
55.3 
Total gross lending
 
378,005 
 
11,015 
 
2.9 
 
3,806 
 
34.6 
Impairment provisions
 
(3,806)
               
Fair value adjustments
 
(3,141)
               
Total Retail
 
371,058 
               

1
Impairment provisions include collective unimpaired provisions.


 
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
As at 
31 Dec 
2009 
   
£m
 
£m 
         
Secured
       
Mainstream
 
265,368 
 
270,069 
Buy to let
 
46,356 
 
44,236 
Specialist
 
29,345 
 
31,595 
   
341,069 
 
345,900 
Unsecured
       
Credit cards
 
11,207 
 
12,301 
Personal loans
 
13,881 
 
16,940 
Bank accounts
 
2,624 
 
2,629 
Others, including joint ventures
 
200 
 
235 
   
27,912 
 
32,105 
Total Retail gross lending
 
368,981 
 
378,005 

Credit risk – Retail (continued)

Overview
·  
The Retail impairment charge was £2,747 million in 2010, a decrease of £1,480 million, or 35 per cent, from 2009.
 
·  
The decrease in the Retail impairment charge was driven primarily by the improved quality of new business and effective portfolio management, combined with a continuing slow recovery of the economy.  The Retail impairment charge for loans and advances to customers, as a percentage of average loans and advances to customers, decreased to 0.74 per cent from 1.11 per cent in 2009.
 
·  
New lending quality continues to be good, with subsequent early arrears at pre-recessionary levels.
 
·  
Average loan-to-value on new mortgage lending in the year was 60.9 per cent (59.3 per cent for 2009) while the average indexed loan-to-value on the mortgage portfolio was 55.6 per cent (54.8 per cent at 31 December 2009) consistent with a modest net fall in house prices since December 2009.
 
·  
Overall volume of customers entering arrears in 2010 compared to 2009 was lower for unsecured lending and flat for secured lending.  Secured early arrears balances increased in the second half of 2010.

Impairment charge
   
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Secured
 
292 
 
789 
 
63 
Unsecured
 
2,455 
 
3,438 
 
29 
Total impairment charge
 
2,747 
 
4,227 
 
35 

Retail’s impairment charge decreased by £1,480 million to £2,747 million in 2010 compared with 2009 and was lower in both the secured and unsecured portfolios.  This improvement was driven primarily by the improved quality of new business and effective portfolio management, combined with the continued slow recovery of the economy.  The lower secured impairment charge reflected reduction in impaired loans and improved arrears in the first half of 2010. Across Retail in 2010, there were fewer cases going into arrears.  The impairment charge on loans and advances to customers, as a percentage of average loans and advances to customers, decreased to 0.74 per cent from 1.11 per cent in 2009.

Impaired loans and provisions
Retail impaired loans decreased by £1.2 billion to £9.8 billion compared with 31 December 2009 and, as a percentage of closing loans and advances to customers, decreased to 2.6 per cent from 2.9 per cent at 31 December 2009.  The reduction in the value of impaired loans reflected the continuing low interest rate environment for mortgages and fewer unsecured loans going into arrears.  Impairment provisions, as a percentage of impaired loans, reduced to 31.8 per cent from 34.6 per cent at 31 December 2009 largely driven by more stringent criteria for new and existing unsecured collections repayment plans resulting in highly provided assets being written off.

Outlook – Retail
The Group remains cautious about the pace and consistency of economic recovery and how this may impact our customers.  The outlook assumes a slow economic recovery resulting in an improvement in the unsecured impairment charge. In the secured portfolio however, there are a mixture of signals from lead indicators, including falling house prices and an increase in secured arrears in the second half of 2010, which lead Retail to expect a higher secured impairment charge in 2011.  Overall the Group anticipates a modest reduction in Retail’s 2011 impairment charge based on the current outlook of a modestly improving economic environment.
 
Credit risk – Retail (continued)

Secured impairment charge
The impairment charge decreased by £497 million, to £292 million in 2010 compared to the previous year.  The main drivers of the reduction were continued benefits from internal activities (risk and collections policies), maintained affordability and the continuing slow recovery of the economy.  However, for the second half of 2010 the impairment charge was greater than the first half due to falling house prices combined with a worsening house price outlook towards the end of the period.  The impairment charge for loans and advances to customers, as a percentage of average loans and advances to customers, decreased to 0.09 per cent from 0.23 per cent in 2009.

Provisions held against secured assets reflect adequate allowance for incurred losses including customers currently on repayment plans or in financial difficulties who are maintaining their repayments whilst interest rates are very low.

Secured impaired loans
Impaired loans decreased by £0.4 billion to £6.8 billion at 31 December 2010 and, as a percentage of closing loans and advances to customers, reduced to 2.0 per cent from 2.1 per cent at 31 December 2009.  The reduction in the value of impaired loans reflects the continued ability of customers to afford their mortgage payments in a low interest rate environment.

The number of customers going into arrears remained stable throughout 2010. In the second half of 2010 fewer accounts in arrears returned to order resulting in higher early arrears balances for 31 December 2010 compared to 30 June 2010.   As reported at the 2009 year end, Specialist lending remains closed to new business and this book is in run-off.

Secured arrears
The percentage of mortgage cases greater than three months in arrears (excluding repossessions) remained stable at 2.3 per cent at 31 December 2010 compared to 31 December 2009.


Greater than
three months in arrears
(excluding repossessions)
 
Number of cases
 
Total mortgage
accounts %
 
Value of debt(1)
 
Total mortgage
balances %
   
31 Dec 
2010 
 
31 Dec 
2009 
 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
31 Dec 
2009 
 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
31 Dec 
2009 
 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
31 Dec 
2009 
   
Cases 
 
Cases 
 
 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
 
                                 
Mainstream
 
55,675 
 
57,837 
 
2.1 
 
2.1 
 
6,247 
 
 6,407 
 
2.4 
 
2.4 
Buy to let
 
7,577 
 
  7,557 
 
1.8 
 
1.9 
 
1,157 
 
 1,159 
 
2.5 
 
2.6 
Specialist
 
12,582 
 
13,848 
 
6.4 
 
6.6 
 
2,262 
 
 2,498 
 
7.7 
 
7.9 
Total
 
75,834 
 
79,242 
 
2.3 
 
2.3 
 
9,666 
 
10,064 
 
2.8 
 
2.9 

1
Value of debt represents total book value of mortgages in arrears but not repossessed.

The stock of repossession cases rose from 2,720 at 31 December 2009 to 3,043 at 31 December 2010.  This still represents a relatively low proportion of the portfolio and was broadly consistent with prior years.


Credit risk – Retail (continued)

Secured loan to value analysis
Management actions have resulted in new lending quality remaining strong.  The average loan-to-value ratio (LTV) for new mortgages and further advances written in 2010 was 60.9 per cent compared with 59.3 per cent for 2009. This is primarily driven by a greater proportion of new lending to first-time buyers and home movers delivering on the Group’s commitment to support new home owners.  The average indexed LTV on the mortgage portfolio at 31 December 2010 was 55.6 per cent compared with 54.8 per cent at 31 December 2009.  House prices, having initially increased, fell in the second half of 2010 resulting in the indexed LTV in excess of 100 per cent ending 2010 at 13.2 per cent of the mortgage portfolio (£44.9 billion), compared with 13.0 per cent (£44.8 billion) at 31 December 2009.  The tables below show LTVs across the principal mortgage portfolios.

The increased average LTVs for impaired Buy to let mortgages, is driven by the modest net fall in house prices and the seasoning of higher risk lending that was closed at the start of 2009.


As at 31 December 2010
 
Mainstream 
 
Buy to let 
 
Specialist1
 
Total 
   
 
 
 
                 
Less than 60%
 
33.0 
 
11.4 
 
14.0 
 
28.5 
60% to 70%
 
12.1 
 
11.1 
 
9.4 
 
11.7 
70% to 80%
 
16.1 
 
21.9 
 
15.9 
 
16.8 
80% to 90%
 
15.3 
 
18.0 
 
21.3 
 
16.2 
90% to 100%
 
11.9 
 
19.1 
 
20.0 
 
13.6 
Greater than 100%
 
11.6 
 
18.5 
 
19.4 
 
13.2 
Total
 
100.0 
 
100.0 
 
100.0 
 
100.0 
Average loan-to-value:
               
Stock of residential mortgages
 
51.9 
 
75.6 
 
72.9 
 
55.6 
New residential lending
 
60.0 
 
66.5 
 
n/a 
 
60.9 
Impaired mortgages
 
72.3 
 
97.8 
 
87.3 
 
78.0 
                 
As at 31 December 2009
 
Mainstream 
 
Buy to let 
 
Specialist1
 
Total 
   
 
 
 
                 
Less than 60%
 
34.4 
 
12.0 
 
14.3 
 
29.7 
60% to 70%
 
11.9 
 
11.3 
 
9.7 
 
11.6 
70% to 80%
 
15.2 
 
20.2 
 
17.0 
 
16.0 
80% to 90%
 
14.3 
 
19.1 
 
21.5 
 
15.6 
90% to 100%
 
12.2 
 
21.4 
 
20.3 
 
14.1 
Greater than 100%
 
12.0 
 
16.0 
 
17.2 
 
13.0 
Total
 
100.0 
 
100.0 
 
100.0 
 
100.0 
Average loan-to-value:
               
Stock of residential mortgages
 
51.0 
 
75.2 
 
72.3 
 
54.8 
New residential lending
 
58.3 
 
65.6 
 
73.7 
 
59.3 
Impaired mortgages
 
71.1 
 
91.5 
 
85.6 
 
76.5 

1
Specialist lending is closed to new business and is in run-off.
 
Credit risk – Retail (continued)
 
Unsecured
In 2010 the impairment charge on loans and advances to customers reduced by £983 million to £2,455 million compared with 2009.  This reflected a continuation of the improving portfolio trends resulting from the Group’s prudent risk appetite, with a focus on lending towards existing customers, combined with stable unemployment.

A combination of reduced demand from customers for personal unsecured borrowing and the Group’s prudent risk policy contributed to loans and advances to customers reducing by £4.2 billion to £27.9 billion at 31 December 2010.

Impaired loans decreased by £0.8 billion to £3.0 billion which represented 10.7 per cent of closing loans and advances to customers at 31 December 2010, compared with 11.9 per cent at 31 December 2009.  The movement in impaired loans is consistent with the trends seen in both the flow of accounts to arrears and arrears balances, both of which have fallen across all unsecured products during 2010. This is a result of tightening credit policy across the credit lifecycle, including stronger controls on customer affordability, set against a stable economic environment. Retail’s exposure to revolving credit products has been actively managed to ensure that it is appropriate to customers’ changing financial circumstances. The portfolios’ results are supported by
pre-recessionary levels of early arrears for accounts acquired in the last two years, highlighting an underlying improvement in the risk profile of the business.

 
Impairment provisions decreased by £0.6 billion, compared with 31 December 2009, to £1.5 billion.  Impairment provisions, as a percentage of impaired loans, decreased to 50.6 per cent at 31 December 2010 from 55.3 per cent at 31 December 2009, largely driven by more stringent criteria for new and existing unsecured collections repayment plans resulting in highly provided assets being written off.

 

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
 

Credit risk – Wholesale

As at 31 December 2010
 
Balance 
 
Impaired 
loans 
 
Impaired 
loans as a
% of
closing
advances 
 
Impairment 
provisions
1
 
Impairment 
provisions 
as a % of 
impaired 
loans 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
 
£m 
 
                     
Corporate Markets
                   
Corporate
 
81,171 
 
6,635 
 
8.2 
 
3,629 
 
54.7 
Commercial
 
29,148 
 
2,856 
 
9.8 
 
993 
 
34.8 
Corporate Real Estate BSU
 
26,151 
 
17,518 
 
67.0 
 
8,091 
 
46.2 
Wholesale Equity
 
140 
 
108 
 
77.1 
 
107 
 
99.1 
Wholesale Markets
 
40,042 
 
5,718 
 
14.3 
 
1,992 
 
34.8 
Total Corporate Markets
 
176,652 
 
32,835 
 
18.6 
 
14,812 
 
45.1 
Treasury and Trading
 
1,050 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Asset Finance
 
9,949 
 
1,679 
 
16.9 
 
1,043 
 
62.1 
Total Wholesale
 
187,651 
 
34,514 
 
18.4 
 
15,855 
 
45.9 
Reverse repos
 
3,096 
               
Impairment provisions
 
(15,855)
               
Fair value adjustments
 
(1,665)
               
Loans and advances to customers
 
173,227
               
                     
Loans and advances to banks
 
12,409 
               
Debt securities2
 
25,781 
               
Available-for-sale financial assets3
 
29,458 
               
                     
As at 31 December 2009
                   
Corporate Markets
                   
Corporate
 
96,865 
 
9,362 
 
9.7 
 
4,698 
 
50.2 
Commercial
 
29,223 
 
2,695 
 
9.2 
 
956 
 
35.5 
Corporate Real Estate BSU
 
25,509 
 
16,505 
 
64.7 
 
8,234 
 
49.9 
Wholesale Equity
 
505 
 
413 
 
81.8 
 
385 
 
93.2 
Wholesale Markets
 
44,606 
 
4,170 
 
9.3 
 
1,675 
 
40.2 
Total Corporate Markets
 
196,708 
 
33,145 
 
16.8 
 
15,948 
 
48.1 
Treasury and Trading
 
1,394 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Asset Finance
 
12,832 
 
1,969 
 
15.3 
 
1,231 
 
62.5 
Total Wholesale
 
210,934 
 
35,114 
 
16.6 
 
17,179 
 
48.9 
Reverse repos
 
1,108 
               
Impairment provisions
 
(17,179)
               
Fair value adjustments
 
(3,055)
               
Loans and advances to customers
 
191,808 
               
                     
Loans and advances to banks
 
18,862 
               
Debt securities
 
31,736 
               
Available-for-sale financial assets
 
36,867 
               

1
Impairment provisions include collective unimpaired provisions.
2
Of which Wholesale Markets is £25,120 million, Wholesale Equity £487 million, Treasury and Trading £163 million, Asset Finance £7 million, Corporate £2 million and Commercial £2 million.
3
Of which Wholesale Markets is £21,279 million, Wholesale Equity £2,109 million, Treasury and Trading £6,011 million and Corporate £59 million.


Credit risk – Wholesale (continued)

Overview
 
·  
Impairment charge for 2010 decreased significantly to £4,446 million, from £15,683 million for 2009.
 
·  
Impairment experience in 2010 was better than guided a year ago as stabilising economic conditions led to lower impairment charges especially in the corporate real estate, real estate related and Corporate (UK and US) portfolios.
 
·  
A robust credit risk management and control framework is in place across the combined portfolios and a prudent risk appetite approach (largely based on Lloyds TSB’s model) continues to be embedded across the division.  Significant resources have been deployed into the Business Support Units focused on key and vulnerable obligors and asset classes.
 

Impairment charge
   
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Corporate Markets
 
4,182 
 
14,855 
 
72 
Asset Finance
 
264 
 
828 
 
68 
Total impairment charge
 
4,446 
 
15,683 
 
72 

Wholesale’s impairment charge decreased £11,237 million, or 72 per cent, compared to £15,683 million for 2009.  Impairment charges as an annualised percentage of average loans and advances to customers reduced to 2.08 per cent from 5.92 per cent in 2009.  Significant actions were taken in the first half of 2009 on the heritage HBOS portfolios, including the identification of large impairments post the HBOS acquisition especially in corporate real estate, real estate related and Corporate (UK and US) portfolios.  Together with the stabilising UK and US economic environment in 2010, a low interest rate environment helping to maintain defaults at a lower level and a number of write backs due to asset disposals, impairment charges have decreased substantially compared with 2009.

Impaired loans and provisions
Wholesale’s impaired loans reduced by £600 million to £34,514 million compared with 31 December 2009.  The reduction is due to new impaired assets, mainly in the Corporate Real Estate Business Support Unit (BSU), being offset by write-offs on irrecoverable assets and the sale of previously impaired assets.  Impairment provisions also reduced as a result of the write-offs and a lower impairment rate on recently impaired assets.  As a result, impairment provisions as a percentage of impaired loans reduced to 45.9 per cent from 48.9 per cent at 31 December 2009.  As a percentage of closing loans and advances to customers, impaired loans increased to 18.4 per cent from 16.6 per cent at 31 December 2009.  This increase is essentially a factor of the reducing level of total loans and advances to customers as at 31 December 2010 compared with 31 December 2009.  We continue to monitor our vulnerable portfolios within Wholesale and, where appropriate, remedial risk mitigating actions are being undertaken.

Outlook – Wholesale
The potential effects of the UK Government’s austerity measures on portfolios vulnerable to Government spending cuts are currently unknown.  Although appropriate early warning indicators and action plans are in place to help mitigate against this, we would expect some negative effect on the portfolio.  This is especially so in the traditional customer lending businesses, which are vulnerable to reduced consumer spending as a result of tax rises, and other UK Government austerity measures.   As previously guided, we expect the overall net impairment charges in our traditional lending businesses (especially in the trading and manufacturing sectors) to increase in 2011, driven in part by a lower benefit from write backs on asset disposals and the effect of the UK Government austerity measures on the wider economy.

Credit risk – Wholesale (continued)

Wholesale retains some material single obligor concentrations on weaker credits, especially from the heritage HBOS real estate and real estate related portfolios.  These portfolios (especially the secondary and tertiary assets which comprise a large part of the heritage HBOS corporate real estate and real estate related portfolio) remain vulnerable to an increase in tenancy defaults and reduced capital values from an already depressed level, particularly in the regions.  However, against our base case assumptions, we expect our impairment charges in corporate real estate to be lower than 2010 as a result of a continuing stabilisation of the existing portfolio and actions taken in 2009 and 2010.  Whilst we therefore remain cautious in respect of the outlook for 2011, we do expect a modest reduction in the total impairment charge for 2011 as a whole.

Corporate
The £81,171 million of loans and advances to customers in the Corporate portfolio is structured across a number of different portfolios and sectors as discussed below:

UK and US Corporate – Showed resilience during 2010 with the impairment charge significantly lower than 2009 levels and modest recoveries as asset prices improved during the first half of the year.  Sentiment among UK corporates during the second half of the year changed as the scale of the Government austerity measures became clearer although most effects are not expected to be felt until 2011.  Major corporate balance sheets are relatively strong with adequate levels of undrawn committed bank facilities available and continued access to the capital markets.  In the Corporate North American portfolio significant reductions were achieved in the non-core portfolio, mostly in the first half when secondary markets were fairly buoyant.  Impairments were significantly lower than in 2009 albeit the overall position is improved by some write backs.

Mid-market Corporate – As anticipated, the slightly more benign conditions experienced in the first half of 2010 were not sustained in the second half in the corporate mid-market.  Impairments rose during the second half of the year, albeit to levels still significantly below those experienced in 2009, with legacy issues in the heritage HBOS portfolio continuing to be a significant driver of impairments in 2010.  Although a number of exporters have been able to take advantage of a beneficial exchange rate, the corporate middle market is dominated by domestically focused businesses and the prospect of public sector spending cuts, tax increases and continuing high commodity and import prices is likely to see confidence remain fragile in 2011.

Corporate Real Estate – The focus is to continue to improve and re-balance the risk profile of the existing portfolio and apply conservative and prudent lending policies in relation to new business.  A significant percentage concentration of customer lending is in real estate and real estate related investment lending, especially heritage HBOS and sustainability of its cash flow in 2010 has been key to the relative resilience seen in the investment market to date.  The portfolio remains vulnerable to tenant default and asset price falls due to a significant element of investment lending in the portfolio, a large element of which is supported by secondary or tertiary assets.  Refinancing risk remains an emerging issue with significant maturities due in the next few years.

Financial Institutions – As part of the Group’s funding, liquidity and general hedging requirements, Corporate maintains relationships with many major financial institutions throughout the world.  During the second half of 2010, concerns about sovereign fiscal deficits and public sector debt levels increased our scrutiny of the European banking sector, in particular the weaker Eurozone countries.  Trading exposures are in large part collateralised and inter bank activity is mainly with high investment grade counterparties.

Credit risk – Wholesale (continued)

Commercial
The Commercial portfolio’s impairment experience has remained steady throughout the year although a slightly higher run-rate was observed in the second half, but overall was materially below that incurred in 2009.  Portfolio metrics including delinquencies and assets under close monitoring, while improving through supportive management actions, remain above benign levels.

Corporate Real Estate Business Support Unit
The Corporate Real Estate Business Support Unit portfolios have endured a significant level of stress as a consequence of the unprecedented scale and pace of deterioration in the property sector since the peak in 2007, coupled with the previous aggressive lending appetite in the heritage HBOS business. Against significant impairments taken in 2009, experience in 2010 is materially lower.  This reflects the stabilising economic environment and the prudent provisioning undertaken on the HBOS corporate real estate and real estate related portfolio in 2009.  The Group continues to remain cautious regarding the short to medium term prospects for the sector.

The management of the distressed portfolio remains key not only to mitigating loss for the Group, but also for the Group as a major lender within the property sector to ensure that the strategies adopted do not adversely impact on a market that remains fragile.   During 2010, a number of restructurings, good level of asset reduction, and continued active management led to a fall in impairments compared to the previous year.

On the property investment side there have been signs of recovery in capital values, specifically at the prime end of the commercial market and in London generally.  Since the half year, this recovery slowed as investor activity and sentiment cooled.  Rental values remain fragile across most property sectors.

Wholesale Equity
The Wholesale Equity portfolio (assets representing ‘Equity Risk’ including ordinary equity, preference shares and debt securities) totals £5.6 billion (split £4.2 billion on balance sheet commitments and £1.4 billion as yet undrawn, the majority of which relates to the Funds Investment business).  The portfolio comprises the two core businesses, Lloyds Development Capital and Project Finance with the remaining businesses (Joint Ventures Equity, BSU Investment portfolios and Fund Investments) all now categorised as non-core.

In terms of market sentiment, the second half of 2010 saw a gradual uptick in main share indices (UK, Europe and USA) which, despite episodic volatility, contributed to a relatively stable valuation position combined with some indication that there may be a slow recovery in market activity.  While signs are on balance currently positive, we remain cautious on prospects for value recovery looking into 2011.

Credit risk – Wholesale (continued)

Wholesale Markets
Loans and advances to customers of £40.0 billion largely comprise balances in the Structured Corporate Finance portfolio, which includes Acquisition Finance (leveraged lending – £11.6 billion), Project Finance and asset based finance.  The Acquisition Finance portfolio continues to be significantly affected by the economic environment, with a relatively high proportion of deals being restructured.  The rate of new problem loans started to abate in the second half of 2009 and this trend continued during 2010.  Refinancing risk is an issue for Acquisition Finance, with significant loan maturities due in the next years.  In Ship Finance, global markets, especially the dry bulk and container sectors, experienced considerable pressure during 2009, leading to higher impairment levels.  The container sector strengthened during 2010, but the Group expects the shipping sector to remain challenging into 2011.

Wholesale Markets is also responsible for the Treasury Assets portfolio which mainly encompasses a portfolio of Asset-Backed Securities and financial institution Floating Rate Note positions.  Further details of Wholesale Division’s Asset-Backed Securities is provided in Note 16 of the Statutory Information.  The size of the Treasury Assets portfolio has reduced through asset sales and amortisation.

Treasury and Trading
Treasury and Trading acts as the link between the wholesale markets and the Group’s balance sheet management activities and provides pricing and risk management solutions to both internal and external clients.

The portfolio comprises £10.7 billion of loans and advances to banks, £6.0 billion of Available-for-Sale debt securities and £1.1 billion of loans and advances to customers (excluding reverse repos).

The majority of Treasury and Trading’s funding and risk management activity is transacted with investment grade counterparties and much of it is on a secured basis, such as repos.  Derivative transactions with wholesale counterparties are typically collateralised under a Credit Support Annex in conjunction with the ISDA Master Agreement.  Treasury and Trading has reduced the government bond portfolio in response to growing concern over market conditions in Europe.  The credit quality of the government bond portfolio is almost solely AAA rated sovereign debt.

Asset Finance
The credit quality of the retail portfolios continues to be relatively stable with key risk indicators continuing to show signs of improvement.  Impairments in 2010 were lower than anticipated, particularly in the second charge secured portfolio and the retail motor loans portfolio.  Asset quality also continues to improve in response to the continuing strategy to enhance the quality of new business written and following the closure of new business by the Personal Financial Services business.  The credit quality profile across the non-retail portfolios also continues to be relatively stable, and impairment levels significantly less than 2009, reflecting a material slow down in new default cases.  Exposures to the Fleet Operator sector, particularly a small number of daily/flexi rental operators, continue to require intensive management to support customers through their financial difficulties, but have not affected impairment levels to the extent seen in 2009.

 


THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
 

Credit risk – Wealth and International

 
 
 
As at 31 December 2010
 
Loans and 
advances 
to 
customers 
 
Impaired 
loans 
 
Impaired
loans as a 
%  of 
closing 
advances 
 
Impairment 
provisions
1
 
Impairment
provisions 
as a % of 
impaired 
loans 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
 
£m 
 
                     
Wealth
 
9,472 
 
353 
 
3.7 
 
116 
 
32.9 
International
                   
Ireland
 
27,428 
 
14,445 
 
52.7 
 
7,763 
 
53.7 
Australia
 
14,587 
 
4,187 
 
28.7 
 
2,208 
 
52.7 
Wholesale Europe
 
7,322 
 
1,007 
 
13.8 
 
420 
 
41.7 
Other
 
7,559 
 
350 
 
4.6 
 
177 
 
50.6 
   
56,896 
 
19,989 
 
35.1 
 
10,568 
 
52.9 
Wealth and International
 
66,368 
 
20,342 
 
30.7 
 
10,684 
 
52.5 
Impairment provisions
 
(10,684)
               
Fair value adjustments
 
(327)
               
Total
 
55,357
               
                     
As at 31 December 2009
                   
Wealth
 
9,523 
 
281 
 
3.0 
 
100 
 
35.6 
International
                   
Ireland
 
29,104 
 
9,712 
 
33.4 
 
3,601 
 
37.1 
Australia
 
14,057 
 
2,030 
 
14.4 
 
966 
 
47.6 
Wholesale Europe
 
8,781 
 
537 
 
6.1 
 
243 
 
45.3 
Other
 
7,937 
 
144 
 
1.8 
 
93 
 
64.6 
   
59,879 
 
12,423 
 
20.7 
 
4,903 
 
39.5 
Wealth and International
 
69,402 
 
12,704 
 
18.3 
 
5,003 
 
39.4 
Impairment provisions
 
(5,003)
               
Fair value adjustments
 
(851)
               
Total
 
63,548 
               

1
Impairment provisions include collective unimpaired provisions.


Impairment charge
   
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
Wealth
 
46 
 
71 
 
35 
International
           
Ireland
 
4,264 
 
2,949 
 
(45)
Australia
 
1,362 
 
849 
 
(60)
Wholesale Europe
 
210 
 
129 
 
(63)
Other International
 
106 
 
80 
 
(33)
   
5,942 
 
4,007 
 
(48)
Total impairment charge
 
5,988 
 
4,078 
 
(47)

 
Credit risk – Wealth and International (continued)

Overview
·  
Increased impairment charges in commercial real estate portfolios in Ireland and Australia were the primary drivers of a divisional increase in impairment of 47 per cent in 2010 compared with 2009.
 
·  
Impairment charges in Ireland increased significantly in the last quarter of 2010 reflecting a material deterioration in market conditions that resulted in EU-IMF financial support in late November 2010.
 
·  
As part of the closure of Bank of Scotland (Ireland) Limited, a dedicated UK based Business Support Unit credit team has been put in place to manage the wind down of the Irish book.
 
·  
Increased impairment charges in Australia are primarily due to real estate concentrations in specific geographical and industry sectors where liquidity has significantly contracted in 2010.
 

Impairment charges
Wealth and International’s impairment charge increased by £1,910 million to £5,988 million in 2010 compared with 2009. Impairment charges as a percentage of average loans and advances to customers increased to 8.90 per cent from 6.04 per cent in 2009.

Impaired loans and provisions
Total impaired loans increased by £7,638 million to £20,342 million compared with £12,704 million at 31 December 2009 and as a percentage of closing loans and advances to customers increased to 30.7 per cent from 18.3 per cent at 31 December 2009. The level of impaired loans in the International business is supported by detailed portfolio reviews conducted during 2010.

In December 2010 responsibility for impaired assets in Ireland was transferred from the local BSU team to a dedicated UK based BSU credit team to manage the wind down of the lending book. In Australia, this activity continues to be managed locally and strengthened through deployment of additional staff. Responsibility for these areas has been consolidated within a new central team, which has considerable experience in work-out strategies and will manage this activity globally for the Group.

Impairment provisions as a percentage of impaired loans increased to 52.5 per cent from 39.4 per cent at 31 December 2009. In the International business the increase in impairment provisions is due to a higher level of impaired loans and an increased coverage level, particularly in Ireland.

Outlook – Wealth and International
Impairment charges in the division are expected to reduce in 2011 compared to the current year charge, although economic conditions in Ireland continue to be monitored closely.  The outlook also remains cautious for the Group's Australian exposures, where there continues to be limited liquidity in regional property markets to which the Group is exposed.

Credit risk – Wealth and International (continued)

Wealth
Total impaired loans increased by £72 million, or 26 per cent to £353 million compared with £281 million at 31 December 2009 and as a percentage of closing loans and advances increased to 3.7 per cent from 3.0 per cent at 31 December 2009.  Impairment charges decreased by £25 million to £46 million compared to £71 million in 2009. This reduction is primarily due to the mortgage lending business in Spain where there has been improved credit management of the book during 2010.

Ireland
Total impaired loans increased by £4,733 million, or 49 per cent to £14,445 million compared with £9,712 million at 31 December 2009 and as a percentage of closing loans and advances increased to 52.7 per cent from 33.4 per cent at 31 December 2009.  Impairment charges increased by £1,315 million to £4,264 million compared to £2,949 million in 2009.  Impairment charges as a percentage of average loans and advances to customers increased to 15.4 per cent from 9.9 per cent in 2009.

Further deterioration in the Irish economy resulted in increased impaired loans in 2010 and coverage levels significantly increased in the last quarter of 2010 reflecting downward revisions in the Group's Irish economic assumptions.

 
Gross 
loans 
 
2010 
Impaired 
loans 
 
 
 
Provisions 
 
Gross 
loans 
2009 
Impaired 
loans 
Provisions 
 
£m 
 
£m
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
                       
Commercial Real Estate
11,685 
 
9,232 
 
4,791 
 
11,738 
 
6,114 
 
2,154 
Corporate
8,070 
 
4,343 
 
2,356 
 
9,094 
 
3,002 
 
1,159 
Retail
7,673 
 
870 
 
616 
 
8,272 
 
596 
 
288 
Total
27,428 
 
14,445 
 
7,763 
 
29,104 
 
9,712 
 
3,601 
                       

The most significant contribution to impairment in Ireland is the commercial real estate portfolio.  Impairment provisions provide 52 per cent coverage on impaired commercial real estate loans – reflecting peak to trough falls in commercial property and house prices widening to 60 per cent and 38 per cent respectively.  Mortgage lending at the year end comprised 96 per cent of the retail portfolio with impaired loans of £0.8 billion and impairment coverage of 65 per cent.

Following the closure of the Irish business, the portfolio is in run-off although current levels of redemptions and recoveries are low due to a severe lack of liquidity.

Australia
Total impaired loans increased by £2,157 million, or 106 per cent to £4,187 million compared with £2,030 million at 31 December 2009 and as a percentage of closing loans and advances increased to 28.7 per cent from 14.4 per cent at 31 December 2009. Impairment charges increased by £513 million to £1,362 million compared to £849 million in 2009. Impairment charges as a percentage of average loans and advances to customers increased to 9.3 per cent from 6.3 per cent in 2009.

Although the economic performance for Australia has been more robust, exposure to the New Zealand and
non-metropolitan Australian commercial real estate sectors remains a key influence on impairment performance.  These markets have suffered a significant reduction in liquidity in 2010, driving increased impaired lending and also constraining recoveries.

Credit risk – Wealth and International (continued)

Wholesale Europe
Total impaired loans increased by £470 million, or 88 per cent to £1,007 million compared with £537 million at 31 December 2009 and as a percentage of closing loans and advances increased to 13.8 per cent from 6.1 per cent at 31 December 2009.  Impairment charges increased by £81 million to £210 million compared to £129 million in 2009.  Impairment charges as a percentage of average loans and advances to customers increased to 2.8 per cent from 2.3 per cent in 2009. Commercial real estate is the primary driver of the impairment charge in Wholesale Europe reflecting a small number of specific transactions.

Other International
Total impaired loans increased by £206 million, or 143 per cent to £350 million compared with £144 million at 31 December 2009 and as a percentage of closing loans and advances increased to 4.6 per cent from 1.8 per cent at 31 December 2009. Impairment charges increased by £26 million to £106 million compared to £80 million in 2009. Impairment charges as a percentage of average loans and advances to customers increased to 1.3 per cent from 1.0 per cent in 2009. The most significant contribution to the impairment charge is from a limited number of corporate exposures which at the year end comprised 82 per cent of impaired lending and 92 per cent of the impairment charge in 2010.

Market risk
Market risk is managed within a Board approved framework using a range of metrics to monitor the Group’s profile against its stated appetite and potential market conditions.

The principal market risks are as follows:

There is a risk to the Group’s banking income arising from the level of interest rates and the margin of interbank rates over central bank rates. A further banking risk arises from competitive pressures on product terms in existing loans and deposits, which sometimes restrict the Group in its ability to change interest rates applying to customers in response to changes in interbank and central bank rates.

The main equity market risks arise in the life assurance companies and staff pension schemes. Credit spread risk arises in the life assurance companies, pension schemes and banking businesses. Equity market movements and changes in credit spreads impact the Group’s results.

Continuing concerns about the scale of deficits in Ireland and southern European countries resulted in increased credit spreads in the areas affected, and fears of contagion affected the Euro and widened spreads between central bank and interbank rates.

The Group’s trading activity is small relative to our peers and is not considered to be a principal risk.  The average 95 per cent 1-day trading Value at Risk (VaR) was £7.4 million for 2010.

Insurance risk
The major sources of insurance risk are within the insurance businesses and the staff defined benefit pension schemes.

Insurance risk is inherent in the insurance business and can be affected by customer behaviour.  Insurance risks accepted relate primarily to mortality, longevity, morbidity, persistency, expenses, property and unemployment.

The primary insurance risk carried by the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes is related to longevity.

Insurance risks typically, and longevity in particular, crystallise gradually over time.  Actuarial assumption setting for financial reporting and liability management requires expert judgement as to when evidence of an emerging trend is sufficient to require an alteration to long-run assumptions.

Legal and regulatory
Legal and regulatory exposure is driven by the significant volume of current legislation and regulation within the UK and overseas with which the Group has to comply, along with new or proposed legislation and regulation which needs to be reviewed, assessed and embedded into day-to-day operational and business practices across the Group as a whole.  This is particularly the case in the current market environment, which is witnessing increased levels of government and regulatory intervention in the banking sector.

The Group continues to face political and regulatory scrutiny as a result of the Group’s perceived systemic importance following the acquisition of HBOS. At the time of the acquisition, the Office of Fair Trading (OFT) identified some competition concerns in the UK personal current accounts and mortgages markets and for SME banking in Scotland. The OFT reiterated that it would keep these under review and consider whether to refer any banking markets to the Competition Commission if it identifies any prevention, restriction or distortion of competition.

The UK Government appointed an Independent Commission on Banking to review possible structural measures to reform the banking system and promote stability and competition.  That commission will publish its final report by the end of September 2011.  The Treasury Select Committee is conducting an examination of competition in retail banking. It is too early to quantify the potential impact of these developments on the Group.

From April 2011, lead regulation and supervision of the Group’s activities will begin transitioning from the FSA to the new Financial Conduct Authority for conduct of business supervision and the Prudential Regulatory Authority for capital and liquidity supervision.  In addition, from 2011, the European Banking Authority, the European Insurance and Occupational Pensions Authority and the European Securities and Markets Authority as new EU Supervisory Authorities are likely to have greater influence on regulatory approaches across the EU.  These could lead to changes in how the Group is regulated and supervised on a day-to-day basis.

Evolving capital and liquidity requirements continue to be a priority for the Group. In September 2010 and further clarified in December 2010,  the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision put forward proposals for a reform package which changes the regulatory capital and liquidity standards, the definition of ‘capital’, introduces new definitions for the calculation of counterparty credit risk and leverage ratios, additional capital buffers and development of a global liquidity standard. Implementation of these changes is expected to be phased in between 2012 and 2018.

The Group is currently assessing the impacts of these regulatory developments and will participate in the consultation and calibration processes to be undertaken by the various regulatory bodies during 2011.  The Insurance division is progressing its plans to achieve Solvency II compliance.  The Group continues to work closely with the regulatory authorities and industry associations to ensure that it is able to identify and respond to proposed regulatory changes and mitigate against risks to the Group and its stakeholders.

There is a risk that certain aspects of the Group’s business may be determined by the authorities or the courts as not being conducted in accordance with applicable laws or regulations, or with what is fair and reasonable in their opinion.  The Group may also be liable for damages to third parties harmed by the conduct of its business.

Customer treatment
Customer treatment and how the Group manages its customer relationships affects all aspects of the Group’s operations and is closely aligned with achievement of the Group’s strategic aim – to create deep long lasting relationships with its customers.  There is currently a high level of scrutiny regarding the treatment of customers by financial institutions from the press, politicians and regulatory bodies.

The FSA continues to drive focus on conduct of business activities and has established a new approach to supervision of Conduct Risk, replacing the previous 'Treating Customers Fairly' initiative for retail customers.  Under this new regime the FSA has indicated that it will seek to place greater emphasis on product governance and contract terms in general, and will seek to intervene much earlier in the product lifecycle to prevent customer detriment.  The FSA also continues to carry out thematic reviews on a variety of issues across the industry as a whole, for example complaints handling.  The Group actively engages with the regulatory authorities and other stakeholders on these key customer treatment challenges, which includes for example, PPI (see Note 23 of the statutory information ‘Contingent liabilities and commitments').

The Group has policies, procedures and governance arrangements in place to facilitate the fair treatment of customers.  Since the acquisition of HBOS, the Group has made significant progress in aligning its approach to Treating Customers Fairly across both heritages.  In addition the Group has aligned its Treating Customers Fairly governance and management information arrangements, with customer impact being a key factor in assessing every integration proposition.  The Group regularly reviews its product range to ensure that it meets regulatory requirements and is competitive in the market place.

People
The Group aims to attract, retain, and develop high calibre talent. Failure to do so would present a significant risk to delivering the Group’s overall strategy and is affected by a range of factors including; ongoing regulatory and public interest in remuneration practices; delivery of the Group’s integration commitments; and uncertainty about EU State Aid requirements and the Independent Commission on Banking’s proposals for banking reform.

The Group’s remuneration arrangements encourage compliant and appropriate behaviour from colleagues, in line with group policies, values and short and long term people risk priorities. The Group has continued to work closely with regulators, to seek to ensure compliance with our obligations. However, there is recognition that international consensus must be achieved to avoid UK institutions being significantly disadvantaged in attracting and retaining the highest calibre talent.

The Group continues to manage union relationships actively and the majority of colleagues are now on harmonised Terms and Conditions. There is strong ongoing commitment to support and retain colleagues throughout a period of significant integration and organisational change.  Active monitoring of the Colleague Engagement Survey, allows the Group to understand engagement levels. These continue to increase and are now exceeding industry benchmarking for high performing organisations.

The Group is closely engaged with the UK Government and regulators on reform proposals, and with the EU on disposal arrangements, to influence and manage colleague uncertainty.

Integration
The integration of the two heritage organisations continues to be one of the largest integration challenges that has been seen in the UK financial services industry.  The Group’s Integration Execution Board, chaired by the Group Operations Director, continues to oversee the integration process and progress is being regularly reviewed by the Group Executive Committee and Group Board.  While there continue to be delivery risks to the programme, not least the risk of new regulatory requirements which may have an effect on resourcing, the Group is now two years into the integration programme and has a fully developed and functioning governance framework to manage these risks.  There is a clear understanding of the phased deliverables to ensure effective delivery through to 2012.

State funding and state aid
HM Treasury currently holds approximately 40.6 per cent of the Group’s ordinary share capital.  United Kingdom Financial Investments Limited (UKFI) as manager of HM Treasury's shareholding continues to operate in line with the framework document between UKFI and HM Treasury managing the investment in the Group on a commercial basis without interference in day-to-day management decisions.  There is a risk that a change in Government priorities could result in the framework agreement currently in place being replaced leading to interference in the operations of the Group, although there have been no indications that the Government intends to change the existing operating arrangements.

The Group has made a number of undertakings to HM Treasury arising from the capital and funding support, including the provision of additional lending to certain mortgage and business sectors until 28 February 2011, and other matters relating to corporate governance and colleague remuneration.  However, the commitments in respect of lending are subject to normal prudent commercial lending criteria and pricing, the availability of funding to support such lending, and the availability of sufficient demand from creditworthy customers and potential customers. The new agreement between the leading UK banks and the Government in relation to gross business lending in the 2011 calendar year is subject to a similar set of criteria.

In addition, the Group is subject to European state aid obligations in line with the restructuring plan agreed with HM Treasury and the EU College of Commissioners in November 2009, which is designed to support the
long-term viability of the Group and address any competition distortions arising from the benefits of state aid.  This has placed a number of requirements on the Group including asset reductions in certain parts of its balance sheet by the end of 2014 and the disposal of certain portions of its business by the end of November 2013, including in particular the disposal of some parts of its retail banking business.  The Group is working closely with the EU Commission, HM Treasury and the Monitoring Trustee appointed by the EU Commission.
 


THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
 

STATUTORY INFORMATION

 
Page 
Primary statements
 
Consolidated income statement
107 
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
108 
Consolidated balance sheet
109 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity
111 
Consolidated cash flow statement
113 
   
Notes
 
1
Accounting policies, presentation and estimates
114 
2
Segmental analysis
118 
3
Other income
121 
4
Operating expenses
122 
5
Impairment
123 
6
Loss on disposal of businesses
123 
7
Taxation
124 
8
Earnings per share
124 
9
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
125 
10
Derivative financial instruments
125 
11
Loans and advances to customers
126 
12
Allowance for impairment losses on loans and receivables
126 
13
Securitisations and covered bonds
127 
14
Debt securities classified as loans and receivables
128 
15
Available-for-sale financial assets
128 
16
Credit market exposures
129 
17
Customer deposits
132 
18
Debt securities in issue
132 
19
Retirement benefit obligations
133 
20
Subordinated liabilities
133 
21
Share capital
134 
22
Reserves
135 
23
Contingent liabilities and commitments
136 
24
Capital ratios
140 
25
Related party transactions
143 
26
Events after the balance sheet date
144 
27
Other information
144 

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

     
2010 
2009 
   
Note 
 
£ million 
 
£ million 
             
Interest and similar income
     
29,340 
 
28,238 
Interest and similar expense
     
(16,794)
 
(19,212)
Net interest income
     
12,546 
 
9,026 
Fee and commission income
     
4,415 
 
4,254 
Fee and commission expense
     
(1,682)
 
(1,517)
Net fee and commission income
     
2,733 
 
2,737 
Net trading income
     
15,724 
 
19,098 
Insurance premium income
     
8,148 
 
8,946 
Other operating income
     
4,316 
 
5,490 
Other income
 
 
30,921 
 
36,271 
Total income
     
43,467 
 
45,297 
Insurance claims
     
(18,511)
 
(22,019)
Total income, net of insurance claims
     
24,956 
 
23,278 
Government Asset Protection Scheme fee
     
– 
 
(2,500)
Other operating expenses
     
(13,270)
 
(13,484)
Total operating expenses
 
 
(13,270)
 
(15,984)
Trading surplus
     
11,686 
 
7,294 
Impairment
 
 
(10,952)
 
(16,673)
Share of results of joint ventures and associates
     
(88)
 
(752)
Gain on acquisition
     
– 
 
11,173 
Loss on disposal of businesses
 
 
(365)
 
– 
Profit before tax
     
281 
 
1,042 
Taxation
 
 
(539)
 
1,911 
(Loss) profit for the year
     
(258)
 
2,953 
             
Profit attributable to non-controlling interests
     
62 
 
126 
(Loss) profit attributable to equity shareholders
     
(320)
 
2,827 
(Loss) profit for the year
     
(258)
 
2,953 
             
Basic earnings per share
 
 
(0.5)p
 
7.5p 
Diluted earnings per share
 
 
(0.5)p
 
7.5p 
             
Dividend per share for the year
     
– 
 
– 
Dividend for the year
     
– 
 
– 
 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

   
2010 
 
2009 
   
£ million 
 
£ million 
         
(Loss) profit for the year
 
(258)
 
2,953 
Other comprehensive income:
       
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of available-for-sale financial assets:
       
Change in fair value
 
1,231 
 
2,234 
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals
 
(399)
 
(97)
Income statement transfers in respect of impairment
 
114 
 
621 
Other income statement transfers
 
(110)
 
(93)
Taxation
 
(343)
 
(417)
   
493 
 
2,248 
Movement in cash flow hedging reserve:
       
Effective portion of changes in fair value taken to other comprehensive income
 
(1,048)
 
(530)
Net income statement transfers
 
932 
 
121 
Taxation
 
30 
 
119 
   
(86)
 
(290)
Currency translation differences:
       
Currency translation differences, before tax
 
(129)
 
(37)
Taxation
 
– 
 
(182)
   
(129)
 
(219)
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax
 
278 
 
1,739 
Total comprehensive income for the year
 
20 
 
4,692 
         
Total comprehensive income attributable to non-controlling interests
 
57 
 
107 
Total comprehensive income attributable to equity shareholders
 
(37)
 
4,585 
Total comprehensive income for the year
 
20 
 
4,692 
 

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET

     
As at 
31 December 
2010 
As at 
31 December 
2009 
Assets
 
Note 
 
£ million 
 
£ million 
             
Cash and balances at central banks
     
38,115 
 
38,994 
Items in course of collection from banks
     
1,368 
 
1,579 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
 
 
156,191 
 
150,011 
Derivative financial instruments
 
10 
 
50,777 
 
49,928 
Loans and receivables:
           
Loans and advances to banks
     
30,272 
 
35,361 
Loans and advances to customers
 
11 
 
592,597 
 
626,969 
Debt securities
 
14 
 
25,735 
 
32,652 
       
648,604 
 
694,982 
Available-for-sale financial assets
 
15 
 
42,955 
 
46,602 
Held-to-maturity investments
     
7,905 
 
– 
Investment properties
     
5,997 
 
4,757 
Investments in joint ventures and associates
     
429 
 
479 
Goodwill
     
2,016 
 
2,016 
Value of in-force business
     
7,367 
 
6,685 
Other intangible assets
     
3,496 
 
4,087 
Tangible fixed assets
     
8,190 
 
9,224 
Current tax recoverable
     
621 
 
680 
Deferred tax assets
     
4,164 
 
5,006 
Retirement benefit assets
 
19 
 
736 
 
– 
Other assets
     
12,643 
 
12,225 
Total assets
     
991,574 
 
1,027,255 

 

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET

     
As at 
31 December 
2010 
As at 
31 December 
20091
Equity and liabilities
 
Note 
 
£ million 
 
£ million 
Liabilities
           
Deposits from banks
     
50,363 
 
82,452 
Customer deposits
 
17 
 
393,633 
 
406,741 
Items in course of transmission to banks
     
802 
 
1,037 
Trading and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
     
26,762 
 
28,271 
Derivative financial instruments
 
10 
 
42,158 
 
40,485 
Notes in circulation
     
1,074 
 
981 
Debt securities in issue
 
18 
 
228,866 
 
233,502 
Liabilities arising from insurance contracts and
participating investment contracts
   
80,729 
 
76,179 
Liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts
     
51,363 
 
46,348 
Unallocated surplus within insurance businesses
     
643 
 
1,082 
Other liabilities
     
29,696 
 
29,320 
Retirement benefit obligations
 
19 
 
423 
 
780 
Current tax liabilities
     
149 
 
51 
Deferred tax liabilities
     
247 
 
209 
Other provisions
     
1,532 
 
983 
Subordinated liabilities
 
20 
 
36,232 
 
34,727 
Total liabilities
     
944,672 
 
983,148 
             
Equity
           
Share capital
 
21 
 
6,815 
 
10,472 
Share premium account
 
22 
 
16,291 
 
14,472 
Other reserves
 
22 
 
11,575 
 
7,217 
Retained profits
 
22 
 
11,380 
 
11,117 
Shareholders’ equity
     
46,061 
 
43,278 
Non-controlling interests
     
841 
 
829 
Total equity
     
46,902 
 
44,107 
Total equity and liabilities
     
991,574 
 
1,027,255 

1
Restated – see note 1.

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

   
Attributable to equity shareholders
       
   
Share  capital 
and  premium 
 
Other 
reserves 
 
Retained 
profits 
 
Total 
Non- 
controlling 
interests 
 
Total
   
£ million 
 
£ million 
 
£ million 
 
£ million 
 
£ million 
 
£ million 
                         
Balance at 1 January 2010
 
24,944 
 
7,217 
 
11,117 
 
43,278 
 
829 
 
44,107 
Comprehensive income
                       
Profit (loss) for the year
 
– 
 
– 
 
(320)
 
(320)
 
62 
 
(258)
Other comprehensive income
                       
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of available-for-sale financial assets, net of tax
– 
 
498 
 
– 
 
498 
 
(5)
 
493 
Movement in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax
 
– 
 
(86)
 
– 
 
(86)
 
– 
 
(86)
Currency translation differences, net of tax
 
– 
 
(129)
 
– 
 
(129)
 
– 
 
(129)
Total other comprehensive income
– 
 
283 
 
– 
 
283 
 
(5)
 
278 
Total comprehensive income
 
– 
 
283 
 
(320)
 
(37)
 
57 
 
20 
Transactions with owners
                       
Dividends
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(47)
 
(47)
Issue of ordinary shares
 
2,237 
 
– 
 
– 
 
2,237 
 
– 
 
2,237 
Redemption of preference shares
11 
 
(11)
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Cancellation of deferred shares
(4,086)
 
4,086 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Purchase/sale of treasury shares1
– 
 
– 
 
429 
 
429 
 
– 
 
429 
Employee share option schemes:
                     
Value of employee services
– 
 
– 
 
154 
 
154 
 
– 
 
154 
Change in non-controlling interests
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
 
Total transactions with owners
 
(1,838)
 
4,075 
 
583 
 
2,820 
 
(45)
 
2,775 
Balance at 31 December 2010
 
23,106 
 
11,575 
 
11,380 
 
46,061 
 
841 
 
46,902 

1
Purchase/sale of treasury shares includes a credit of £409 million (2009: £128 million) relating to the cost of other employee award plans.

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY (continued)

   
Attributable to equity shareholders
       
   
Share  capital 
and  premium 
 
Other 
reserves1
 
Retained 
profits1
 
Total 
Non- 
controlling 
interests 
 
Total
   
£ million 
 
£ million 
 
£ million 
 
£ million 
 
£ million 
 
£ million 
                         
Balance at 1 January 2009:
                       
As previously stated
 
3,609 
 
(2,476)
 
8,260 
 
9,393 
 
306 
 
9,699 
Prior year adjustment1
 
– 
 
131 
 
(131)
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Restated
 
3,609 
 
(2,345)
 
8,129 
 
9,393 
 
306 
 
9,699 
Comprehensive income
                       
Profit for the year
 
– 
 
– 
 
2,827 
 
2,827 
 
126 
 
2,953 
Other comprehensive income
                       
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of available-for-sale financial assets, net of tax
– 
 
2,248 
 
– 
 
2,248 
 
– 
 
2,248 
Movement in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax
 
– 
 
(290)
 
– 
 
(290)
 
– 
 
(290)
Currency translation differences, net of tax
 
– 
 
(200)
 
– 
 
(200)
 
(19)
 
(219)
Total other comprehensive income
 
– 
 
1,758 
 
– 
 
1,758 
 
(19)
 
1,739 
Total comprehensive income
 
– 
 
1,758 
 
2,827 
 
4,585 
 
107 
 
4,692 
Transactions with owners
                       
Dividends
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(116)
 
(116)
Issue of ordinary shares:
                       
Placing and open offer
 
649 
 
3,781 
 
– 
 
4,430 
 
– 
 
4,430 
Issued on acquisition of HBOS
1,944 
 
5,707 
 
– 
 
7,651 
 
– 
 
7,651 
Placing and compensatory
open offer
 
3,905 
 
– 
 
– 
 
3,905 
 
– 
 
3,905 
Rights issue
 
13,112 
 
– 
 
– 
 
13,112 
 
– 
 
13,112 
Issued to Lloyds TSB Foundations
41 
 
– 
 
– 
 
41 
 
– 
 
41 
Adjustment on acquisition
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
5,567 
 
5,567 
Transfer to merger reserve
 
(1,000)
 
1,000 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Redemption of preference shares
2,684 
 
(2,684)
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Purchase/sale of treasury shares
 
– 
 
– 
 
45 
 
45 
 
– 
 
45 
Employee share option schemes:
                     
Value of employee services
– 
 
– 
 
116 
 
116 
 
– 
 
116 
Extinguishment of non-controlling interests
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(5,035)
 
(5,035)
Total transactions with owners
 
21,335 
 
7,804 
 
161 
 
29,300 
 
416 
 
29,716 
Balance at 31 December 20091
 
24,944 
 
7,217 
 
11,117 
 
43,278 
 
829 
 
44,107 

1
Restated – see note 1.


 
CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT

       
2010 
 
2009 
       
£ million 
 
£ million 
             
Profit before tax
     
281 
 
1,042 
Adjustments for:
           
Change in operating assets
     
31,860 
 
61,942 
Change in operating liabilities
     
(45,683)
 
(105,927)
Non-cash and other items
     
11,173 
 
8,907 
Tax received
     
332 
 
301 
Net cash used in operating activities
     
(2,037)
 
(33,735)
             
Cash flows from investing activities
           
Purchase of available-for-sale financial assets
     
(42,662)
 
(455,816)
Proceeds from sale and maturity of available-for-sale financial assets
 
45,999 
 
490,561 
Purchase of held-to-maturity investments
 
(4,228)
 
– 
Purchase of fixed assets
     
(3,216)
 
(2,689)
Proceeds from sale of fixed assets
     
1,354 
 
2,129 
Acquisition of businesses, net of cash acquired
     
(73)
 
16,227 
Disposal of businesses, net of cash disposed
     
428 
 
411 
Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities
     
(2,398)
 
50,823 
             
Cash flows from financing activities
           
Dividends paid to non-controlling interests
     
(47)
 
(116)
Interest paid on subordinated liabilities
     
(1,942)
 
(2,622)
Proceeds from issue of subordinated liabilities
     
3,237 
 
4,187 
Proceeds from issue of ordinary shares
     
– 
 
21,533 
Repayment of subordinated liabilities
     
(684)
 
(6,897)
Change in non-controlling interests
     
 
(33)
Net cash provided by financing activities
     
566 
 
16,052 
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents
     
479 
 
(210)
Change in cash and cash equivalents
     
(3,390)
 
32,930 
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year
     
65,690 
 
32,760 
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year
     
62,300 
 
65,690 

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash and balances at central banks (excluding mandatory deposits) and amounts due from banks with a maturity of less than three months.

 
1.           Accounting policies, presentation and estimates

These financial statements as at and for the year to 31 December 2010 have been prepared in accordance with the Listing Rules of the Financial Services Authority relating to Preliminary Results.  They do not include all of the information that will be included in the full annual financial statements.  The Group’s consolidated financial statements as at and for the year ended 31 December 2010 have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as adopted by the European Union.  Copies of the 2010 annual report and accounts will be available from 30 March 2011, will be published on the Group’s website and will be available upon request from Group Secretariat, Lloyds Banking Group plc, 25 Gresham Street, London EC2V 7HN.

The Directors consider that it is appropriate to continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the Group's financial statements.  In reaching this assessment, the directors have considered projections for the Group's capital and funding position and have had regard to the factors set out in Principal Risks and Uncertainties: Liquidity and funding on pages 77 to 78.

Accounting policies
The accounting policies are consistent with those applied by the Group in its 2009 annual report and accounts except as described below.

During 2010, the International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee clarified the treatment of amounts previously recognised in equity in respect of assets that were transferred from the available-for-sale category to the loans and receivables category.  When an impairment loss is recognised in respect of such transferred financial assets, the unamortised balance of any available-for-sale reserve that remains in equity should be transferred to the income statement and recorded as part of the impairment loss.

The Group has changed its accounting policy to reflect this clarification.  Under the Group’s previous accounting policy, when such a transferred financial asset became impaired, not all of the unamortised amounts previously transferred to equity were recycled to the income statement and therefore continued to be accreted over the expected remaining life of the financial asset.  The change in policy is applied retrospectively and the effect has been to reduce retained profits and increase available-for-sale reserves by £131 million at 1 January 2009; shareholders’ equity is unchanged.  There was no material effect on the Group’s income statement during 2009.

Also during 2010, the Group has classified assets as held-to-maturity for the first time.  Purchases of debt securities amounting to £4,228 million made in the second half of 2010 were classified as held-to-maturity on acquisition, were initially recognised at fair value including direct and incremental transaction costs and are being measured subsequently at amortised cost, using the effective interest method.  Further, on 1 November 2010, government debt securities with a carrying value of £3,601 million, previously classified as available-for-sale, were reclassified to held-to-maturity.  Unrealised gains on the transferred securities of £223 million previously taken to equity continue to be held in the available-for-sale revaluation reserve and will be amortised to the income statement over the remaining lives of the securities using the effective interest method or until the assets become impaired.

 
1.
Accounting policies, presentation and estimates (continued)

Critical accounting estimates and judgements
The preparation of the Group’s financial statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions in applying the accounting policies that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses.  Due to the inherent uncertainty in making estimates, actual results reported in future periods may be based upon amounts which differ from those estimates.  Estimates, judgements and assumptions are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances.

The nature of the significant judgements made by management in applying the accounting policies and the key sources of estimation uncertainty applied by the Group in these financial statements are the same as those applied by the Group in its 2009 annual report and accounts.

New accounting pronouncements
The Group has adopted the following new standards and amendments to standards which became effective for financial years beginning on or after 1 January 2010.  None of these standards or amendments has had a material impact on these financial statements.

(i)  
IFRS 3 Business Combinations. This revised standard applies prospectively to business combinations from 1 January 2010.  The revised standard continues to require the use of the acquisition method of accounting for business combinations.  All payments to purchase a business are to be recorded at fair value at the acquisition date, some contingent payments are subsequently remeasured at fair value through income, goodwill may be calculated based on the parent’s share of net assets or it may include goodwill related to the non-controlling interest, and all transaction costs are expensed.

(ii)  
IAS 27 Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements.  Requires the effects of all transactions with
 
non-controlling interests to be recorded in equity if there is no change in control; any remaining interest in an investee is re-measured to fair value in determining the gain or loss recognised in profit or loss where control over the investee is lost.

(iii)  
IFRIC 17 Distributions of Non-cash Assets to Owners.  Provides accounting guidance for non-reciprocal distributions of non-cash assets to owners (and those in which owners may elect to receive a cash alternative).

(iv)  
Amendment to IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement – ‘Eligible Hedged Items’.  Clarifies how the principles underlying hedge accounting should be applied in particular situations.

(v)  
Improvements to IFRSs (issued April 2009).  Sets out minor amendments to IFRS standards as part of the annual improvements process.

 
1.
Accounting policies, presentation and estimates (continued)

Future accounting developments
The following pronouncements will be relevant to the Group but were not effective at 31 December 2010 and have not been applied in preparing these consolidated financial statements.  The full impact of these accounting changes is currently being assessed by the Group.

(i)
Amendment to IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation – Classification of Rights Issues  Requires rights issues denominated in a currency other than the functional currency of the issuer to be classified as equity regardless of the currency in which the exercise price is denominated.  The amendment is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 February 2010.

(ii)
Improvements to IFRSs (issued May 2010).  Sets out minor amendments to IFRS standards as part of the annual improvements process.  The effective dates vary on a standard by standard basis but none are effective any earlier than annual periods beginning on or after 1 July 2010.

(iii)
IFRIC 19 Extinguishing Financial Liabilities with Equity Instruments.  Clarifies that when an entity renegotiates the terms of its debt with the result that the liability is extinguished by the debtor issuing its own equity instruments to the creditor, a gain or loss is recognised in the income statement representing the difference between the carrying value of the financial liability and the fair value of the equity instruments issued; the fair value of the financial liability is used to measure the gain or loss where the fair value of the equity instruments cannot be reliably measured. This interpretation is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 July 2010 and is consistent with the Group’s existing accounting policy.

(iv)
Amendment to IFRIC 14 Prepayments of a Minimum Funding Requirement.  Applies when an entity is subject to minimum funding requirements in respect of its defined benefit plans and makes an early payment of contributions to cover those requirements and permits such an entity to treat the benefit of such an early payment as an asset.  The amendment is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2011.

(v)
IAS 24 Related Party Disclosures.  Simplifies the definition of a related party and provides a partial exemption from the disclosure requirements for related party transactions with government related entities.  The revised standard is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2011.

(vi)
Amendments to IFRS 7 Financial Instruments Disclosures – Disclosures – Transfers of Financial Assets.  Requires additional disclosures in respect of risk exposures arising from transferred financial assets.  The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 July 2011.

(vii)
Amendments to IAS 12 Income Taxes – Deferred Tax: Recovery of Underlying Assets.  Introduces a rebuttable presumption that investment property measured at fair value is recovered entirely through sale and that deferred tax in respect of such investment property is recognised on that basis.  The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2012.

 
1.         Accounting policies, presentation and estimates (continued)

(viii)
IFRS 9 Financial Instruments. Replaces those parts of IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement relating to the classification, measurement and derecognition of financial assets and liabilities. Requires financial assets to be classified into two measurement categories, fair value and amortised cost, on the basis of the objectives of the entity’s business model for managing its financial assets and the contractual cash flow characteristics of the instrument.  The available-for-sale financial asset and held-to-maturity investment categories in the existing IAS 39 will be eliminated.  The requirements for financial liabilities and financial derecognition are broadly unchanged from IAS 39.

 
IFRS 9 is the initial stage of the project to replace IAS 39.  Future stages are expected to result in amendments to IFRS 9 to deal with changes to the impairment of financial assets measured at amortised cost and hedge accounting.  Until all stages of the replacement project are complete, it is not possible to determine the overall impact on the financial statements of the replacement of IAS 39.  The effective date of the standard is annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2013.

At the date of this report, IFRS 9, the Amendments to IFRS 7 and the Amendments to IAS 12 are awaiting EU endorsement.

2.         Segmental analysis

Lloyds Banking Group provides a wide range of banking and financial services in the UK and in certain locations overseas.

The Group Executive Committee (GEC) has been determined to be the chief operating decision maker for the Group.  The Group’s operating segments reflect its organisational and management structures.  GEC reviews the Group’s internal reporting based around these segments in order to assess performance and allocate resources.  This assessment includes a consideration of each segment’s net interest revenue and consequently the total interest income and expense for all reportable segments is presented on a net basis.  The segments are differentiated by the type of products provided, by whether the customers are individuals or corporate entities and by the geographical location of the customer.

The Group's activities continue to be organised into four financial reporting segments: Retail, Wholesale, Wealth and International and Insurance.  The segmental results and comparatives are presented on the basis reviewed by the chief operating decision maker and as a consequence the comparatives for 2009 include the pre-acquisition results of HBOS for the period from 1 January 2009 to 16 January 2009.

Retail offers a broad range of retail financial service products in the UK, including current accounts, savings, personal loans, credit cards and mortgages.  It is also a major general insurance and bancassurance distributor, selling a wide range of long-term savings, investment and general insurance products.

The Wholesale division serves in excess of a million businesses ranging from start-ups and small enterprises to global corporations, with a range of propositions segmented according to customer need.  The division comprises Corporate Markets, Treasury and Trading and Asset Finance.

Wealth and International was created in 2009 to give increased focus and momentum to the Group's private banking and asset management activities and to closely co-ordinate the management of its international businesses.  Wealth comprises the Group's private banking, wealth and asset management businesses in the UK and overseas.  International comprises corporate, commercial, asset finance and retail businesses, principally in Australia and Continental Europe.

The Insurance division provides long-term savings, investment and protection products distributed through the retail branch network, intermediary and direct channels in the UK.  It is also a distributor of home insurance in the UK with products sold through the retail branch network, direct channels and strategic corporate partners.  The division consists of three business units: Life, Pensions and Investments UK; Life Pensions and Investments Europe; and General Insurance.

Other includes the results of managing the Group’s technology platforms, branch and head office property estate, operations (including payments, banking operations and collections) and procurement services, the costs of which are predominantly recharged to the other divisions.  It also reflects other items not recharged to the divisions, including hedge ineffectiveness and certain capital and wholesale liquidity funding costs.

2.         Segmental analysis (continued)

Inter-segment services are generally recharged at cost, with the exception of the internal commission arrangements between the UK branch and other distribution networks and the insurance product manufacturing businesses within the Group, where a profit margin is also charged.  Inter-segment lending and deposits are generally entered into at market rates, except that non-interest bearing balances are priced at a rate that reflects the external yield that could be earned on such funds.

For those derivative contracts entered into by business units for risk management purposes, the business unit retains the amount that would have been recognised on an accrual accounting basis (an amount equal to the interest element of the next payment on the swap) and transfers the remainder of the fair value of the swap to the central group segment where the resulting accounting volatility is managed though the establishment of hedge accounting relationships.  Any change in fair value of the hedged instrument attributable to the hedged risk is also recorded within the central group segment.  This allocation of the fair value of the swap and change in fair value of the hedged instrument attributable to the hedged risk avoids accounting asymmetry in segmental results and records volatility in the central group segment where it is managed.

2010
 
Net 
interest 
income 
 
Other 
income 
 
Total 
income 
 
Profit 
before 
tax 
 
External 
revenue 
 
Inter- 
segment 
revenue 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
                         
Retail
 
9,378 
 
1,607 
 
10,985 
 
4,716 
 
13,603 
 
(2,618)
Wholesale
 
4,426 
 
4,136 
 
8,562 
 
3,257 
 
3,969 
 
4,593 
Wealth and International
 
1,176 
 
1,160 
 
2,336 
 
(4,824)
 
3,000 
 
(664)
Insurance
 
(263)
 
2,814 
 
2,551 
 
1,102 
 
3,180 
 
(629)
Other
 
(895)
 
447 
 
(448)
 
(2,039)
 
234 
 
(682)
Group –
combined businesses basis1
 
13,822 
 
10,164 
 
23,986 
 
2,212 
 
23,986 
 
– 
Insurance grossing adjustment
 
(949)
 
19,162 
 
18,213 
 
– 
       
Integration costs
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(1,653)
       
Volatility arising in insurance businesses
 
(26)
 
332 
 
306 
 
306 
       
Fair value unwind
 
(301)
 
1,263 
 
962 
 
– 
       
Amortisation of purchased intangibles
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(629)
       
Pension curtailment gain
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
910 
       
Customer goodwill payments provision
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(500)
       
Loss on disposal of businesses
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(365)
       
Group – statutory
 
12,546 
 
30,921 
 
43,467 
 
281 
       

1
See pages 9 and 29.

 
2.         Segmental analysis (continued)

Segment external assets
 
As at 
31 Dec 
2010 
 
As at 
31 Dec 
20091
   
£m 
 
£m 
         
Retail
 
370,708 
 
383,588 
Wholesale
 
355,582 
 
401,836 
Wealth and International
 
85,158 
 
86,272 
Insurance
 
144,540 
 
135,814 
Other
 
35,586 
 
19,745 
Total Group
 
991,574 
 
1,027,255 
         
Segment customer deposits
       
Retail
 
235,591 
 
224,149 
Wholesale
 
124,262 
 
153,389 
Wealth and International
 
32,784 
 
29,037 
Other
 
996 
 
166 
Total Group
 
393,633 
 
406,741 

1
Restated to reflect the reclassification of certain balances managed on behalf of Wholesale by Wealth and International.


2009
Net 
interest 
income 
Other 
income 
Total 
income 
Profit  before 
tax 
External 
Revenue2
Inter- 
segment  revenue2
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
                         
Retail
 
7,970 
 
1,804 
 
9,774 
 
1,382 
 
14,221 
 
(4,447)
Wholesale
 
4,710 
 
4,199 
 
8,909 
 
(4,703)
 
4,165 
 
4,744 
Wealth and International
 
1,217 
 
1,128 
 
2,345 
 
(2,356)
 
2,859 
 
(514)
Insurance
 
(287)
 
2,944 
 
2,657 
 
975 
 
3,780 
 
(1,123)
Other
 
(884)
 
1,800 
 
916 
 
(1,598)
 
(424)
 
1,340 
Group –
combined businesses basis1
 
12,726 
 
11,875 
 
24,601 
 
(6,300)
 
24,601 
 
– 
Insurance grossing adjustment
 
(1,280)
 
21,659 
 
20,379 
 
– 
       
Integration costs
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(1,096)
       
Volatility arising on insurance business
 
(11)
 
479 
 
468 
 
478 
       
Fair value unwind
 
(2,166)
 
1,135 
 
(1,031)
 
– 
       
Negative goodwill credit
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
11,173 
       
Amortisation of purchased intangibles and goodwill impairment
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(993)
       
GAPS fee
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
(2,500)
       
Pre-acquisition consolidated losses of HBOS
 
(243)
 
1,123 
 
880 
 
280 
       
Group – statutory
 
9,026 
 
36,271 
 
45,297 
 
1,042 
       

1
See pages 9 and 30.
2
Restated to reflect the reclassification of certain central adjustments.

3.         Other income
       
2010 
 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Fee and commission income:
           
Current account fees
     
1,086 
 
1,088 
Credit and debit card fees
     
812 
 
765 
Other fees and commissions
     
2,517 
 
2,401 
       
4,415 
 
4,254 
Fee and commission expense
     
(1,682)
 
(1,517)
Net fee and commission income
     
2,733 
 
2,737 
Net trading income
     
15,724 
 
19,098 
Insurance premium income
     
8,148 
 
8,946 
Gains on capital transactions
     
423 
 
1,498 
Other
     
3,893 
 
3,992 
Other operating income
     
4,316 
 
5,490 
Total other income
     
30,921 
 
36,271 

During 2009 and 2010, as part of the Group's management of capital, the Group exchanged certain existing subordinated debt securities for new subordinated debt securities and ordinary shares.  These exchanges resulted in a gain on extinguishment of the existing liabilities of £423 million (2009: £1,498 million), being the difference between the carrying amount of the securities extinguished and the fair value of the new securities issued together with related fees and costs.

On 18 February 2010, as part of the Group’s recapitalisation and exit from its proposed participation in the Government Asset Protection Scheme, Lloyds Banking Group plc issued 3,141 million ordinary shares in exchange for certain existing preference shares and preferred securities.  This exchange resulted in a gain of £85 million.

During March 2010 the Group entered into a bilateral exchange, under which certain Enhanced Capital Notes denominated in Japanese Yen were exchanged for an issue of new Enhanced Capital Notes denominated in US Dollars; the securities subject to the exchange were cancelled and a profit of £20 million arose.

In addition, during May and June 2010 the Group completed the exchange of a number of outstanding capital securities issued by Lloyds Banking Group plc and certain of its subsidiaries for ordinary shares in Lloyds Banking Group plc.  The securities subject to exchange were cancelled, generating a total profit of £318 million for the Group.
 

4.
Operating expenses
       
2010  
 
2009  
       
£m  
 
£m  
             
Administrative expenses
           
Staff costs:
           
Salaries
     
                          4,220  
 
4,369  
Social security costs
     
396  
 
383  
Pensions and other post-retirement benefit schemes:
           
Curtailment gains, net
       
(910)
     
– 
 
Other
       
628 
     
744 
 
       
(282)   
 
744  
Restructuring costs
     
119  
 
412  
Other staff costs
     
1,016  
 
767  
       
5,469  
 
6,675  
Premises and equipment:
           
Rent and rates
     
601  
 
569  
Hire of equipment
     
18  
 
20  
Repairs and maintenance
     
199  
 
226  
Other
     
407  
 
341  
       
1,225  
 
1,156  
Other expenses:
           
Communications and data processing
     
891  
 
668  
Advertising and promotion
     
362  
 
335  
Professional fees
     
742  
 
540  
Customer goodwill payments provision (note 26)
     
500  
 
–  
Other
     
1,447  
 
1,310  
       
3,942  
 
2,853  
       
10,636  
 
10,684  
Depreciation and amortisation
     
2,432  
 
2,560  
Impairment of tangible fixed assets1
     
202  
 
–  
Goodwill impairment
     
–  
 
240  
Total operating expenses, excluding GAPS fee
     
13,270  
 
13,484  
Government Asset Protection Scheme fee
     
–  
 
2,500  
Total operating expenses
     
13,270  
 
15,984  

1
£52 million of the impairment of tangible fixed assets relates to integration activities.

Following changes by the Group to the terms of its UK defined benefit pension schemes, all future increases to pensionable salary will be capped each year at the lower of: the Retail Prices Index inflation; each employee’s actual percentage increase in pay; and 2 per cent of pensionable pay.  In addition to this, during the second half of the year there was a change in commutation factors in certain defined benefit schemes.  The combined effect of these changes is a reduction in the Group’s defined benefit obligation of £1,081 million and a reduction in the Group’s unrecognised actuarial losses of £171 million, resulting in a net curtailment gain of £910 million recognised in the income statement and an equivalent reduction in the balance sheet liability.

5.         Impairment
       
2010 
 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Impairment losses on loans and receivables:
           
Loans and advances to banks
     
(13)
 
(3)
Loans and advances to customers
     
10,727 
 
15,783 
Debt securities classified as loans and receivables
     
57 
 
248 
Impairment losses on loans and receivables (note 12)
     
10,771 
 
16,028 
Impairment of available-for-sale financial assets
 
106 
 
602 
Other credit risk provisions
     
75 
 
43 
Total impairment charged to the income statement
     
10,952 
 
16,673 


6.         Loss on disposal of businesses

During 2009, the Group acquired an oil drilling rig construction business through a previous lending relationship and consolidated the results and net assets of the business from the date it exercised control.

In the first half of 2010, as a result of a deteriorating market, the Group impaired the oil drilling rigs under construction held by the business by £150 million to reflect their reduced value in use.  This impairment was recognised in the Wholesale segment.

In the second half of 2010, the Group reached agreement to dispose of its interests in the two wholly-owned subsidiary companies through which this business operates; the sale was completed in January 2011. These companies, which had gross assets of £860 million, were sold to Seadrill Limited; a loss of £365 million arose on disposal.

The Group extended vendor financing, on normal commercial terms and negotiated on an arms length basis, to Seadrill to facilitate the acquisition of the rig holding companies. The loan is not contingent on the performance of the oil rigs under construction. Accordingly, as at 31 December 2010, the subsidiaries were derecognised.

 
7.         Taxation

A reconciliation of the charge that would result from applying the standard UK corporation tax rate to profit before tax, to the tax (charge) credit, is given below:
       
2010 
 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Profit before tax
     
281 
 
1,042 
             
Tax charge thereon at UK corporation tax rate of 28% (2009: 28%)
 
(79)
 
(292)
Factors affecting tax charge:
           
UK corporation tax rate change
     
(137)
 
– 
Goodwill
     
– 
 
3,061 
Disallowed and non-taxable items
     
 
408 
Overseas tax rate differences
     
134 
 
(352)
Gains exempted or covered by capital losses
     
65 
 
(14)
Policyholder interests
     
(227)
 
(295)
Tax losses where no deferred tax provided
     
(487)
 
(332)
Adjustments in respect of previous years
     
218 
 
(66)
Effect of profit (loss) in joint ventures and associates
     
(25)
 
(211)
Other items
     
(6)
 
Tax (charge) credit
     
(539)
 
1,911 

The Finance (No 2) Act 2010 included legislation to reduce the main rate of corporation tax from 28 per cent to 27 per cent with effect from 1 April 2011.  As a result the Group’s deferred tax asset reduced by £132 million, resulting in a charge to the income statement of £137 million and a credit to other comprehensive income of £5 million.  In addition, following the triggering of relevant tax variation clauses, the reduction in future rental income within the Group’s leasing business has resulted in an additional charge to the income statement of £18 million.

The proposed further reductions in the rate of corporation tax by 1 per cent per annum to 24 per cent by 1 April 2014 are expected to be enacted separately each year starting in 2011.  The effect of these further changes upon the Group’s deferred tax balances and leasing business cannot be reliably quantified at this stage.


8.         Earnings per share
       
2010 
2009 
             
Basic
           
(Loss) profit attributable to equity shareholders
     
£(320)m
 
£2,827m 
Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue
     
67,117m 
 
37,674m 
Earnings per share
     
(0.5)p
 
7.5p 
             
Fully diluted
           
(Loss) profit attributable to equity shareholders
     
£(320)m
 
£2,827m 
Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue
     
67,117m 
 
37,929m 
Earnings per share
     
(0.5)p
 
7.5p 

9.         Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
       
2010 
 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Trading assets
     
23,707 
 
27,245 
             
Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:
           
Loans and advances to customers
     
325 
 
166 
Loans and advances to banks
     
– 
 
635 
Debt securities
     
41,946 
 
37,815 
Equity shares
     
90,213 
 
84,150 
       
132,484 
 
122,766 
       
156,191 
 
150,011 

Included in the above is £129,702 million (31 December 2009: £118,573 million) of assets relating to the insurance business.

10.         Derivative financial instruments
   
2010 
 
2009 
   
Fair value 
of assets 
Fair value 
of liabilities 
 
Fair value 
of assets 
 
Fair value 
of liabilities 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
                 
Hedging
               
Derivatives designated as fair value hedges
 
4,972 
 
1,235 
 
4,624 
 
1,236 
Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges
 
2,432 
 
3,163 
 
4,762 
 
7,432 
Derivatives designated as net investment hedges
 
– 
 
44 
 
19 
   
7,406 
 
4,398 
 
9,430 
 
8,687 
Trading and other
               
Exchange rate contracts
 
8,811 
 
4,551 
 
9,206 
 
3,913 
Interest rate contracts
 
31,131 
 
31,670 
 
25,942 
 
26,216 
Credit derivatives
 
256 
 
207 
 
1,711 
 
444 
Embedded equity conversion feature
 
1,177 
 
– 
 
1,797 
 
– 
Equity and other contracts
 
1,996 
 
1,332 
 
1,842 
 
1,225 
   
43,371 
 
37,760 
 
40,498 
 
31,798 
Total recognised derivative assets/liabilities
 
50,777 
 
42,158 
 
49,928 
 
40,485 

The Group reduces exposure to credit risk by using master netting agreements and by obtaining cash collateral.  Of the derivative assets of £50,777 million at 31 December 2010 (31 December 2009: £49,928 million), £31,740 million (31 December 2009: £21,698 million) are available for offset under master netting arrangements.  These do not meet the criteria under IAS 32 to enable derivative assets to be presented net of these balances.  Of the remaining derivative assets of £19,037 million (31 December 2009: £28,230 million), cash collateral of £1,429 million (31 December 2009: £6,645 million) was held and a further £8,385 million (31 December 2009: £13,004 million) was due from Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) banks.

The embedded equity conversion feature of £1,177 million (31 December 2009: £1,797 million) reflects the value of the equity conversion feature contained in the Enhanced Capital Notes issued by the Group in 2009; the loss of £620 million arising from the change in fair value over 2010 (2009: loss of £427 million) is included within net trading income.

 
11.         Loans and advances to customers
       
2010 
 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Agriculture, forestry and fishing
     
5,558 
 
5,130 
Energy and water supply
     
3,576 
 
3,031 
Manufacturing
     
11,495 
 
14,912 
Construction
     
7,904 
 
10,830 
Transport, distribution and hotels
     
34,176 
 
31,820 
Postal and communications
     
1,908 
 
1,662 
Property companies
     
78,263 
 
83,820 
Financial, business and other services
     
59,363 
 
66,923 
Personal:
           
Mortgages
     
356,261 
 
362,667 
Other
     
36,967 
 
42,958 
Lease financing
     
8,291 
 
9,307 
Hire purchase
     
7,208 
 
8,710 
       
610,970 
 
641,770 
Allowance for impairment losses on loans and advances (note 12)
     
(18,373)
 
(14,801)
Total loans and advances to customers
     
592,597 
 
626,969 

Loans and advances to customers include advances securitised under the Group's securitisation and covered bonds programmes.  Further details are given in note 13.


12.         Allowance for impairment losses on loans and receivables
     
2010 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Balance at 1 January
     
15,380 
 
3,727 
Exchange and other adjustments
     
112 
 
161 
Advances written off
     
(7,125)
 
(4,200)
Recoveries of advances written off in previous years
     
216 
 
110 
Unwinding of discount
     
(403)
 
(446)
Charge to the income statement
     
10,771 
 
16,028 
Balance at 31 December
     
18,951 
 
15,380 
             
In respect of:
           
Loans and advances to banks
     
20 
 
149 
Loans and advances to customers
     
18,373 
 
14,801 
Debt securities
     
558 
 
430 
Balance at 31 December
     
18,951 
 
15,380 

 
13.         Securitisations and covered bonds

The Group's principal securitisation and covered bond programmes, together with the balances of the loans subject to these arrangements and the carrying value of the notes in issue at 31 December, are listed in the table below.

 
2010
 
2009
 
Gross 
assets 
securitised 
 
Notes in 
issue 
 
Gross 
assets 
securitised 
 
Notes in 
issue 
Securitisation programmes
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
                 
UK residential mortgages
 
146,200 
 
114,428 
 
152,443 
 
129,698 
Commercial loans
11,860 
 
8,936 
 
13,071 
 
8,266 
Irish residential mortgages
 
6,007 
 
6,191 
 
6,522 
 
6,585 
Credit card receivables
 
7,327 
 
3,856 
 
5,155 
 
2,699 
Dutch residential mortgages
 
4,526 
 
4,316 
 
4,800 
 
4,663 
Personal loans
 
3,012 
 
2,011 
 
3,730 
 
2,613 
PPP/PFI and project finance loans
 
776 
 
110 
 
877 
 
45 
Corporate banking loans and revolving credit facilities
 
– 
 
– 
 
595 
 
Motor vehicle loans
 
926 
 
975 
 
443 
 
470 
   
180,634 
 
140,823 
 
187,636 
 
155,046 
Less held by the Group
     
(100,081)
     
(117,489)
Total securitisation programmes (note 18)
     
40,742 
     
37,557 
                 
Covered bond programmes
               
Residential mortgage-backed
93,651 
 
73,458 
 
99,753 
 
76,636 
Social housing loan-backed
3,317 
 
2,181 
 
3,356 
 
2,735 
 
96,968 
 
75,639 
 
103,109 
 
79,371 
Less held by the Group
   
(43,489)
     
(52,060)
Total covered bond programmes (note 18)
   
32,150 
     
27,311 
               
Total securitisation and covered bond programmes
   
72,892 
     
64,868 

Securitisation programmes
Loans and advances to customers and debt securities classified as loans and receivables include loans securitised under the Group's securitisation programmes, the majority of which have been sold by subsidiary companies to bankruptcy remote special purpose entities (SPEs).  As the SPEs are funded by the issue of debt on terms whereby the majority of the risks and rewards of the portfolio are retained by the subsidiary, the SPEs are consolidated fully and all of these loans are retained on the Group's balance sheet, with the related notes in issue included within debt securities in issue.  In addition to the SPEs detailed above, the Group sponsors four conduit programmes: Argento, Cancara, Grampian and Landale.

Covered bond programmes
Certain loans and advances to customers have been assigned to bankruptcy remote limited liability partnerships to provide security to issues of covered bonds by the Group.  The Group retains all of the risks and rewards associated with these loans and the partnerships are consolidated fully with the loans retained on the Group's balance sheet and the related covered bonds in issue included within debt securities in issue.

Cash deposits of £36,579 million (31 December 2009: £31,480 million) held by the Group are restricted in use to repayment of the debt securities issued by the SPEs, the term advances relating to covered bonds and other legal obligations.

 
14.         Debt securities classified as loans and receivables

Debt securities classified as loans and receivables comprise:
     
2010 
 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Asset-backed securities:
           
Mortgage-backed securities
     
11,650 
 
13,322 
Other asset-backed securities
     
12,827 
 
17,137 
Corporate and other debt securities
     
1,816 
 
2,623 
       
26,293 
 
33,082 
Allowance for impairment losses (note 12)
     
(558)
 
(430)
Total
     
25,735 
 
32,652 


15.         Available-for-sale financial assets
     
2010 
 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Asset-backed securities
     
9,512 
 
12,421 
Other debt securities:
           
Bank and building society certificates of deposit
     
407 
 
1,014 
Government securities
     
12,552 
 
8,669 
Other public sector securities
     
29 
 
31 
Corporate and other debt securities
     
12,132 
 
19,904 
       
25,120 
 
29,618 
Equity shares
     
2,255 
 
2,031 
Treasury bills and other bills
     
6,068 
 
2,532 
Total
     
42,955 
 
46,602 

 
16.           Credit market exposures

The table below summarises the Wholesale division’s exposure to asset-backed securities.

 
Loans and 
receivables 
Available- 
for-sale 
Fair value 
through 
profit 
or loss
Net  exposure 
2010 
Net  exposure 
2009 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m
 
£m 
 
£m 
                     
Mortgage-backed securities
                   
US residential
 
4,242 
 
– 
 
– 
 
4,242 
 
4,826 
Non-US residential
 
4,916 
 
2,982 
 
– 
 
7,898 
 
9,655 
Commercial
 
2,397 
 
1,119 
 
– 
 
3,516 
 
3,737 
   
11,555 
 
4,101 
 
– 
 
15,656 
 
18,218 
Collateralised debt obligations
                   
Corporate
 
43 
 
– 
 
– 
 
43 
 
86 
Commercial real estate
 
306 
 
– 
 
– 
 
306 
 
509 
Other
 
106 
 
39 
 
– 
 
145 
 
196 
Collateralised loan obligations
 
3,578 
 
1,108 
 
– 
 
4,686 
 
5,745 
   
4,033 
 
1,147 
 
– 
 
5,180 
 
6,536 
Personal sector
                   
Auto loans
 
569 
 
339 
 
– 
 
908 
 
1,730 
Credit cards
 
1,795 
 
338 
 
– 
 
2,133 
 
3,720 
Personal loans
 
663 
 
263 
 
– 
 
926 
 
999 
   
3,027 
 
940 
 
– 
 
3,967 
 
6,449 
Federal family education loan programme student loans (FFELP)
 
5,078
 
2,699 
 
– 
 
7,777 
 
9,244 
                     
Other asset-backed securities
 
572 
 
463 
 
– 
 
1,035 
 
1,183 
Total uncovered asset-backed securities
 
24,265 
 
9,350 
 
– 
 
33,615
 
41,630 
                     
Negative basis1
 
– 
 
42 
 
1,067 
 
1,109 
 
1,233 
   
24,265 
 
9,392 
 
1,067 
 
34,724 
 
42,863 
                     
Direct
 
15,860 
 
5,369 
 
1,067 
 
22,296 
 
27,599 
Conduits
 
8,405 
 
4,023 
 
– 
 
12,428 
 
15,264 
Total Wholesale asset-backed securities
 
24,265 
 
9,392 
 
1,067 
 
34,724 
 
42,863 

1
Negative basis means bonds held with separate matching credit default swap (CDS) protection.

16.         Credit market exposures (continued)

The table below sets out the Wholesale division’s net exposure to US residential mortgage-backed securities by vintage.

 
Pre-2005 
 
2005 
 
2006 
 
2007 
Net 
exposure 
2010 
Net 
exposure 
2009 
Asset class
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
                       
Prime
233 
 
215 
 
66 
 
28 
 
542 
 
859 
Alt-A
121 
 
765 
 
1,437 
 
1,377 
 
3,700 
 
3,967 
Sub-prime
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Total
354 
 
980 
 
1,503 
 
1,405 
 
4,242 
 
4,826 

Exposures to monolines
During 2009 all direct exposure to sub-investment grade monolines on CDS contracts was written down to zero, leaving limited exposure to monoline insurers as set out below.



 
Credit default swaps
 
Wrapped loans and receivables
 
Wrapped bonds
 
Notional 
Net 
exposure1
 
Notional 
Net 
exposure2
 
Notional 
Net 
exposure2
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
Investment grade
1,060 
 
40 
 
330 
 
214 
 
– 
 
– 
Sub-investment grade
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Total
1,060 
 
40 
 
330 
 
214 
 
– 
 
– 

1
The exposure to monolines arising from negative basis trades is calculated as the mark-to-market of the CDS protection purchased from the monoline insurer after credit valuation adjustments.
2
The exposure to monolines on wrapped loans and receivables and bonds is the internal assessment of amounts that will be recovered on interest and principal shortfalls.

In addition, the Group has £1,985 million (31 December 2009: £2,703 million) of monoline wrapped bonds and £425 million (31 December 2009: £791 million) of monoline liquidity commitments on which the Group currently places no reliance on the guarantor.

Structured investment vehicles
The Group has no residual exposure to structured investment vehicles’ capital notes.

 
16.         Credit market exposures (continued)

Credit ratings
An analysis of external credit ratings as at 31 December 2010 of the Wholesale division’s asset-backed security portfolio by asset class is provided below.

Asset class
Net 
exposure 
 
AAA 
 
AA 
 
 
BBB 
 
BB 
 
 
Below 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
Mortgage-backed securities
                             
US residential
                               
Prime
 
542 
 
312 
 
110 
 
82 
 
26 
 
 
 
– 
Alt-A
 
3,700 
 
2,037 
 
801 
 
591 
 
186 
 
66 
 
19 
 
– 
Sub-prime
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
   
4,242 
 
2,349 
 
911 
 
673 
 
212 
 
75 
 
22 
 
– 
Non-US residential
 
7,898 
 
6,170 
 
1,415 
 
237 
 
76 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Commercial
 
3,516 
 
754 
 
1,390 
 
637 
 
585 
 
62 
 
– 
 
88 
   
15,656 
 
9,273 
 
3,716 
 
1,547 
 
873 
 
137 
 
22 
 
88 
                                 
Collateralised debt
obligations
                               
Corporate
 
43 
 
 
27 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
11 
Commercial real estate
 
306 
 
18 
 
– 
 
– 
 
105 
 
128 
 
27 
 
28 
Other
 
145 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
105 
 
– 
 
40 
CLO1
 
4,686 
 
760 
 
2,189 
 
1,210 
 
140 
 
234 
 
98 
 
55 
   
5,180 
 
783 
 
2,216 
 
1,210 
 
245 
 
467 
 
125 
 
134 
                                 
Personal sector
                               
Auto loans
 
908 
 
764 
 
68 
 
44 
 
– 
 
32 
 
– 
 
– 
Credit cards
 
2,133 
 
1,762 
 
371 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Personal loans
 
926 
 
230 
 
306 
 
325 
 
65 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
   
3,967 
 
2,756 
 
745 
 
369 
 
65 
 
32 
 
– 
 
– 
FFELP
Student loans
 
7,777 
 
7,646 
 
– 
 
48 
 
64 
 
19 
 
– 
 
– 
                                 
Other asset-backed
securities
 
1,035
 
114 
 
– 
 
296 
 
517 
 
108 
 
– 
 
– 
                                 
Negative basis2
                               
Monolines
 
1,067 
 
191 
 
633 
 
243 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Banks
 
42 
 
42 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
   
1,109 
 
233 
 
633 
 
243 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
 
– 
Total as at 31 Dec 2010
 
34,724 
 
20,805 
 
7,310 
 
3,713 
 
1,764 
 
763 
 
147 
 
222 
                                 
Total as at 31 Dec 2009
 
42,863 
 
31,086 
 
6,375 
 
2,915 
 
1,276 
 
725 
 
92 
 
394 

1
Collateralised loan obligations.
2
The external credit rating is based on the bond ignoring the benefit of the CDS.

 
17.         Customer deposits
     
2010 
 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Sterling:
           
Non-interest bearing current accounts
     
21,516 
 
8,091 
Interest bearing current accounts
     
73,859 
 
89,597 
Savings and investment accounts
     
215,733 
 
204,562 
Other customer deposits
     
50,414 
 
76,028 
Total sterling
     
361,522 
 
378,278 
Currency
     
32,111 
 
28,463 
Total
     
393,633 
 
406,741 

Included above are liabilities of £11,145 million (2009: £35,554 million) in respect of securities sold under repurchase agreements.


18.         Debt securities in issue

   
2010
 
2009
 
At fair value 
through 
profit or 
loss 
At 
amortised 
cost 
 
Total 
At fair value 
through  profit or  loss 
 
At 
amortised 
cost 
 
Total 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
                         
Medium-term notes issued
 
6,665 
 
80,975 
 
87,640 
 
6,160 
 
82,876 
 
89,036 
Covered bonds (note 13)
 
– 
 
32,150 
 
32,150 
 
– 
 
27,311 
 
27,311 
Certificates of deposits
 
– 
 
42,276 
 
42,276 
 
– 
 
50,858 
 
50,858 
Securitisation notes (note 13)
 
– 
 
40,742 
 
40,742 
 
– 
 
37,557 
 
37,557 
Commercial paper
 
– 
 
32,723 
 
32,723 
 
– 
 
34,900 
 
34,900 
   
6,665 
 
228,866 
 
235,531 
 
6,160 
 
233,502 
 
239,662 

 
19.         Retirement benefit obligations
     
2010 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Defined benefit pension schemes
           
Present value of funded obligations
     
(26,862)
 
(27,073)
Fair value of scheme assets
     
26,382 
 
23,518 
Net defined benefit pension scheme deficit
     
(480)
 
(3,555)
Unrecognised actuarial losses
     
959 
 
2,936 
Net recognised defined benefit pension scheme asset (liability)
     
479 
 
(619)
Other post-retirement benefit schemes
     
(166)
 
(161)
Net recognised asset (liability) before tax
     
313 
 
(780)
             
Reported on the balance sheet as:
           
Retirement benefit assets
     
736 
 
– 
Retirement benefit obligations
     
(423)
 
(780)
Net recognised asset (liability) before tax
     
313 
 
(780)


20.Subordinated liabilities

The movement in subordinated liabilities during the year was as follows:
           
£m 
             
At 1 January 2010
         
34,727 
Issued during the year
         
3,511 
Repurchases and redemptions during the year
         
(3,618)
Foreign exchange and other movements
         
1,612 
At 31 December 2010
         
36,232 

 
21.         Share capital
       
Number of  shares 
   
       
(million) 
 
£m 
             
Ordinary shares of 10p each
           
At 1 January 2010
     
63,775 
 
6,378 
Issued in the year
     
4,299 
 
429 
At 31 December 2010
     
68,074 
 
6,807 
             
Limited voting ordinary shares of 10p each
           
At 1 January and 31 December
     
81 
 
             
Deferred shares of 15p each
           
At 1 January 2010
     
27,243 
 
4,086 
Cancellation of deferred shares
     
(27,243)
 
(4,086)
At 31 December 2010
     
– 
 
– 
Total share capital
         
6,815 

On 5 November 2010 Lloyds Banking Group plc cancelled all of its deferred shares and an amount of £4,086 million was credited to the capital redemption reserve.

On 18 February 2010, Lloyds Banking Group plc issued 3,141 million ordinary shares as consideration for the redemption of certain preference shares and preferred securities.

During May and June 2010, Lloyds Banking Group plc issued a further 1,158 million ordinary shares in relation to three separate exchanges for preference shares and other subordinated liabilities issued by the Group.

 
22.         Reserves
       
Other reserves
   
   
Share 
premium 
   
Available- 
for-sale 
 
Cash flow 
hedging 
 
Merger 
and other 
   
Total 
 
Retained 
profits 
   
£m 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
   
£m 
 
£m 
                             
At 1 January 2010:
                           
As previously stated
 
14,472 
   
(914)
 
(305)
 
8,305 
   
7,086 
 
11,248 
Prior year adjustment1
– 
   
131 
 
– 
 
– 
   
131 
 
(131)
Restated
 
14,472 
   
(783)
 
(305)
 
8,305 
   
7,217 
 
11,117 
Issue of ordinary shares
 
1,808 
   
– 
 
– 
 
– 
   
– 
 
– 
Redemption of preference shares
 
11 
   
– 
 
– 
 
(11)
   
(11)
 
– 
Cancellation of deferred shares2
 
– 
   
– 
 
– 
 
4,086 
   
4,086 
 
– 
Loss for the year
 
– 
   
– 
 
– 
 
– 
   
– 
 
(320)
Purchase/sale of treasury shares
 
– 
   
– 
 
– 
 
– 
   
– 
 
429 
Value of employee
services
– 
   
– 
 
– 
 
– 
   
– 
 
154 
Change in fair value of available-for-sale assets (net of tax)
 
– 
   
763 
 
– 
 
– 
   
763 
 
– 
Change in fair value of hedging derivatives
(net of tax)
 
– 
   
– 
 
(779)
 
– 
   
(779)
 
– 
Transfers to income statement (net of tax)
 
– 
   
(265)
 
693 
 
– 
   
428 
 
– 
Exchange and other
 
– 
   
– 
 
– 
 
(129)
   
(129)
 
– 
At 31 December 2010
 
16,291 
   
(285)
 
(391)
 
12,251 
   
11,575 
 
11,380 
                             

1
See note 1.
2
See note 21.
 

23.         Contingent liabilities and commitments

Unarranged overdraft charges
In April 2007, the Office of Fair Trading (OFT) commenced an investigation into the fairness of personal current accounts and unarranged overdraft charges.  At the same time, it commenced a market study into wider questions about competition and price transparency in the provision of personal current accounts.

The Supreme Court of the United Kingdom published its judgment in respect of the fairness of unarranged overdraft charges on personal current accounts on 25 November 2009, finding in favour of the litigant banks.  On 22 December 2009, the OFT announced that it will not continue its investigation into the fairness of these charges.  The Group is working with the regulators to ensure that outstanding customer complaints are concluded as quickly as possible and anticipates that most cases in the county courts will be discontinued.  The Group expects that some customers will argue that despite the test case ruling they are entitled to a refund of unarranged overdraft charges on the basis of other legal arguments or challenges. It is not practicable to quantify the claims.  The Group is robustly defending any such complaints or claims and does not expect any such complaints or claims to have a material effect on the Group.

The OFT however continued to discuss its concerns in relation to the personal current account market with the banks, consumer groups and other organisations under the auspices of its Market Study into personal current accounts.  In October 2009, the OFT published voluntary initiatives agreed with the industry and consumer groups to improve transparency of the costs and benefits of personal current accounts and improvements to the switching process.  On 16 March 2010 the OFT published a further update announcing several further voluntary industry wide initiatives to improve a customer’s ability to control whether they used an unarranged overdraft and to assist those in financial difficulty.  However, in light of the progress it noted in the unarranged overdraft market since July 2007 and the progress it expects to see over the next two years, it has decided to take no further action at this time and will review the unarranged overdraft market again in 2012.

 
23.         Contingent liabilities and commitments (continued)

Interchange fees
The European Commission has adopted a formal decision finding that an infringement of European Commission competition laws has arisen from arrangements whereby MasterCard issuers charged a uniform fallback interchange fee in respect of cross border transactions in relation to the use of a MasterCard or Maestro branded payment card.  The European Commission has required that the fee be reduced to zero for relevant cross-border transactions within the European Economic Area.  This decision has been appealed to the General Court of the European Union (the General Court). Lloyds TSB Bank plc and Bank of Scotland plc (along with certain other MasterCard issuers) have successfully applied to intervene in the appeal in support of MasterCard’s position that the arrangements for the charging of a uniform fallback interchange fee are compatible with European Commission competition laws.  MasterCard has announced that it has reached an understanding with the European Commission on a new methodology for calculating intra European Economic Area multi-lateral interchange fees on an interim basis pending the outcome of the appeal.  Meanwhile, the European Commission and the UK’s OFT are pursuing investigations with a view to deciding whether arrangements adopted by other payment card schemes for the levying of uniform fallback interchange fees in respect of domestic and/or cross-border payment transactions also infringe European Commission and/or UK competition laws.  As part of this initiative, the OFT will also intervene in the General Court appeal supporting the European Commission position and Visa reached an agreement with the European Commission to reduce the level of interchange for cross-border debit card transactions to the interim levels agreed by MasterCard.  The ultimate impact of the investigations on the Group can only be known at the conclusion of these investigations and any relevant appeal proceedings.

Payment protection insurance
There has been extensive scrutiny of the Payment Protection Insurance (PPI) market in recent years.

In October 2010, the UK Competition Commission (Competition Commission) confirmed its decision to prohibit the active sale of PPI by a distributor to a customer within 7 days of a sale of credit. This followed the completion of its formal investigation into the supply of PPI services (other than store card PPI) to non-business customers in the UK in January 2009 and a referral of the proposed prohibition to the Competition Appeal Tribunal. Following an earlier decision to stop selling single premium PPI products, the Group ceased to offer PPI products to its customers in July 2010.

On 1 July 2008, the Financial Ombudsman Service (FOS) referred concerns regarding the handling of PPI complaints to the Financial Services Authority (FSA) as an issue of wider implication.  On 29 September 2009 and 9 March 2010, the FSA issued consultation papers on PPI complaints handling.  The FSA proposed new guidance on the fair assessment of a complaint and the calculation of redress and a new rule requiring firms to reassess historically rejected complaints.  The FSA published its Policy Statement on 10 August 2010, setting out a new set of rules for PPI complaints handling and redress which had to be implemented by 1 December 2010.

On 8 October 2010, the British Bankers Association (BBA), the principal trade association for the UK banking and financial services sector, filed an application for permission to seek judicial review against the FSA and the FOS.  The BBA is seeking an order quashing the FSA Policy Statement and an order quashing the decision of the FOS to determine PPI sales in accordance with the guidance published on its website in November 2008.  The Judicial Review hearing was held in late January 2011 and the judgment (which may be subject to appeal) is expected shortly.

 
23.         Contingent liabilities and commitments (continued)

This legal challenge has affected the implementation of the Policy Statement, since the challenge has called into question the standards to be applied when assessing PPI complaints.  As a result of that challenge, a large number of complaints cannot be decided until the outcome of the legal challenge is clear and implemented.

The ultimate impact on the Group of the FSA's complaints handling policy (if implemented in full) and the FOS’s most recent approach to PPI complaints could be material to the Group’s financial position, although the precise effect can only be assessed once the legal proceedings have been finally determined and the steps the Group may be required to take identified and implemented.  In addition, it is not practicable to quantify the potential financial impact of the implementation of the Policy Statement given the material uncertainties around, for example, applicable time periods, the extent of application of root cause analysis, the treatment of evidence and the ultimate emergence period for complaints, driven in large part by the activities of the claims management companies, all of which will significantly affect complaints volumes, uphold rates and redress costs.  No provision has been made in these financial statements to reflect implementation of the FSA’s complaints handling policy in its current form.

Following concerns expressed by the FSA, it announced in its statement on 29 September 2009 that several firms had agreed to carry out reviews of past sales of single premium loan protection insurance.  Lloyds Banking Group has agreed in principle that it will undertake a review in relation to sales of single premium loan protection insurance made through its branch network since 1 July 2007. The precise details of the review are still being discussed with the FSA.  The ultimate impact on Lloyds Banking Group of any review could be material but can only be known at the conclusion of these discussions.

US sanctions
In January 2009 Lloyds TSB Bank plc announced the settlement it had reached with the US Department of Justice and the New York County District Attorney's Office in relation to their investigations into historic US dollar payment practices involving countries, persons or entities subject to the economic sanctions administered by the US Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC).  On 22 December 2009 OFAC announced the settlement it had reached with Lloyds TSB Bank plc in relation to its investigation and confirmed that the settlement sum due to OFAC had been fully satisfied by Lloyds TSB Bank plc’s payment to the Department of Justice and the New York District Attorney’s Office.  No further enforcement actions are expected in relation to the matters set out in the settlement agreements.

On 26 February 2009, a purported shareholder filed a derivative civil action in the Supreme Court of New York, Nassau County against certain current and former directors, and nominally against Lloyds TSB Bank plc and Lloyds Banking Group plc, seeking various forms of relief.  The derivative action is at an early stage and settlement is being discussed and the ultimate outcome is not expected to have a material impact on the Group.

European Union gender directive
An opt-out clause to the European Union Gender Directive currently permits insurers to take gender into account as a risk factor when pricing contracts.  In March 2011, the European Court of Justice is expected to rule on whether this infringes fundamental European rights for equal treatment.  If the European Court of Justice rules that the opt-out clause does infringe such rights, it could alter the market and alter prices for insurance products to a significant extent. At 31 December 2010, no provision has been made for the potential costs of rectifying contracts in existence at 31 December 2010, should this ultimately be required.  The ultimate impact on the Group can only be known following the European Court of Justice’s ruling.  However, the Group does not expect the final outcome of this matter to have a material adverse effect on its financial position.

 
23.         Contingent liabilities and commitments (continued)

Other legal actions and regulatory matters
In the course of its business, the Group is engaged in discussions with the FSA in relation to a range of conduct of business matters, especially in relation to retail products including packaged bank accounts, mortgages, structured products and pensions.  The Group is keen to ensure that any regulatory concerns regarding product governance or contract terms are understood and addressed.  The ultimate impact on the Group of these discussions can only be known at the conclusion of such discussions.

In addition, during the ordinary course of business the Group is subject to other threatened and actual legal proceedings (which may include class action lawsuits brought on behalf of customers, shareholders or other third parties), regulatory investigations, regulatory challenges and enforcement actions, both in the UK and overseas.  All such material matters are periodically reassessed, with the assistance of external professional advisers where appropriate, to determine the likelihood of the Group incurring a liability.  In those instances where it is concluded that it is more likely than not that a payment will be made, a provision is established to management's best estimate of the amount required to settle the obligation at the relevant balance sheet date. In some cases it will not be possible to form a view, either because the facts are unclear or because further time is needed properly to assess the merits of the case and no provisions are held against such matters.  However the Group does not currently expect the final outcome of any such case to have a material adverse effect on its financial position.

Contingent liabilities and commitments arising from the banking business
     
2010 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Contingent liabilities
           
Acceptances and endorsements
     
48 
 
59 
Other:
           
Other items serving as direct credit substitutes
     
1,319 
 
1,494 
Performance bonds and other transaction-related contingencies
   
2,812 
 
4,555 
       
4,131
 
6,049 
Total contingent liabilities
     
4,179 
 
6,108 
             
Commitments
           
Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions
 
255 
 
288 
Forward asset purchases and forward deposits placed
     
887 
 
758 
         
Undrawn formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend:
       
Less than 1 year original maturity:
       
Mortgage offers made
     
8,113 
 
9,058 
Other commitments
     
60,528 
 
64,786 
       
68,641 
 
73,844 
1 year or over original maturity
     
47,515 
 
53,693 
Total commitments
     
117,298 
 
128,583 

 
24.         Capital ratios

Capital resources
 
2010 
 
20091
   
£m 
 
£m 
         
Core tier 1
       
Ordinary share capital and reserves
 
46,879 
 
44,275 
Regulatory post-retirement benefit adjustments
 
(1,052)
 
434 
Available-for-sale revaluation reserve
 
285 
 
783 
Cash flow hedging reserve
 
391 
 
305 
Other items
 
306 
 
231 
   
46,809 
 
46,028 
Less: deductions from core tier 1
       
Goodwill and other intangible assets
 
(5,224)
 
(5,779)
Other deductions
 
(214)
 
(445)
Core tier 1 capital
 
41,371 
 
39,804 
         
Perpetual non-cumulative preference shares
       
Preference share capital2
 
1,507 
 
2,639 
Innovative tier 1 capital instruments
       
Preferred securities2
 
4,338 
 
4,956 
Less: deductions from tier 1
       
Other deductions
 
(69)
 
– 
Total tier 1 capital
 
47,147 
 
47,399 
         
Tier 2
       
Available-for-sale revaluation reserve in respect of equities
 
462 
 
221 
Undated subordinated debt
 
1,968 
 
2,575 
Eligible provisions
 
2,468 
 
2,694 
Dated subordinated debt
 
23,167 
 
20,068 
         
Less: deductions from tier 2
       
Other deductions
 
(283)
 
(445)
Total tier 2 capital
 
27,782 
 
25,113 
         
Supervisory deductions
       
Unconsolidated investments – life
 
(10,042)
 
(10,015)
Unconsolidated investments – general insurance & other
 
(3,070)
 
(1,551)
Total supervisory deductions
 
(13,112)
 
(11,566)
Total capital resources
 
61,817 
 
60,946 
         
Risk-weighted assets
 
406,372 
 
493,307 
         
Core tier 1 capital ratio
 
10.2% 
 
8.1% 
Tier 1 capital ratio
 
11.6% 
 
9.6% 
Total capital ratio
 
15.2% 
 
12.4% 

1
Restated to reflect a prior year adjustment to available-for-sale revaluation reserves (see note 1).
2
Covered by grandfathering provisions issued by FSA.

 
24.         Capital ratios (continued)

Tier 1 capital
Core tier 1 capital increased by £1,567 million largely reflecting the issue of ordinary shares in exchange for certain preference shares, preferred securities and undated subordinated debt issued by the Group.  This has been partially offset by a deduction in respect of post-retirement benefits reflecting the impact of the curtailment gain, which is not allowed for capital purposes and a commitment to make increased deficit contributions to the HBOS Final Salary Pension Scheme following the completion of an actuarial valuation.

Tier 1 capital has decreased by £252 million over the year.  The increase in core tier 1 capital was more than offset by the redemption of the preference shares and preferred securities as part of the liability management exercises referred to above.

The movements in core tier 1 and tier 1 capital in the year are shown below:
 
Core tier 1 
 
Tier 1 
   
£m 
 
£m 
         
At 31 December 2009
 
39,804 
 
47,399 
Loss attributable to ordinary shareholders
 
(320)
 
(320)
Issue of ordinary shares
 
2,237 
 
2,237 
Increase in regulatory post-retirement benefit adjustments
 
(1,486)
 
(1,486)
Redemption of preference shares and preferred securities
 
– 
 
(1,869)
Decrease in goodwill, intangible assets and other deductions
 
786 
 
717 
Other movements
 
350 
 
469 
At 31 December 2010
 
41,371 
 
47,147 

Tier 2 capital
Tier 2 capital has increased principally as a result of new issues of tier 2 debt and favourable foreign exchange rate movements which have more than offset the redemption of undated subordinated debt described above, the amortisation for regulatory purposes of dated subordinated debt and lower eligible provisions.

Supervisory deductions
Supervisory deductions mainly consist of investments in subsidiary undertakings that are not within the banking group for regulatory purposes.  These investments are primarily the Scottish Widows and Clerical Medical life and pensions businesses together with general insurance business.  Supervisory deductions relating to these businesses have benefitted from the repatriation of capital during the year.  Also included within deductions for other unconsolidated investments at December 2010 are investments in non-financial entities that are held by the Group's private equity (including venture capital) businesses.  These investments were previously risk weighted in accordance with industry wide guidance provided by the FSA.  This guidance has now expired.
 

24.         Capital ratios (continued)

Risk-weighted assets
 
2010 
2009 
   
£m 
 
£m 
         
Divisional analysis of risk-weighted assets:
       
Retail
 
109,254 
 
128,592 
Wholesale
 
222,716 
 
285,951 
Wealth and International
 
58,714 
 
63,249 
Group Operations and Central items
 
15,688 
 
15,515 
   
406,372 
 
493,307 
         
Risk type analysis of risk weighted assets:
       
Advanced IRB
 
– 
 
92,076 
Foundation IRB
 
114,490 
 
67,621 
Retail IRB
 
105,475 
 
124,503 
Other IRB
 
14,483 
 
22,418 
Advanced approach
 
234,448 
 
306,618 
Standardised approach
 
124,492 
 
145,486 
Credit risk
 
358,940 
 
452,104 
Operational risk
 
31,650 
 
25,339 
Market and counterparty risk
 
15,782 
 
15,864 
Total risk-weighted assets
 
406,372 
 
493,307 

Risk-weighted assets decreased by £86,935 million to £406,372 million.  This reflects balance sheet reductions across all banking divisions, a revised assessment of Retail secured lending risk-weighted assets following improvements in the economic outlook and changes introduced as a result of continuing the process of integrating the two banks’ regulatory capital approaches which have impacted particularly on Wholesale.

The FSA has issued the Group an integrated waiver direction effective from 31 December 2010.  The principal changes resulting from this are to move the heritage HBOS non-retail Advanced IRB portfolios to a Foundation approach.  All material retail portfolios across the Group remain on Retail IRB.  In anticipation of moving to The Standardised Approach (TSA) for measurement of operational risk, the Group has calculated operational risk risk-weighted assets on the basis of TSA.

The Group has adopted Foundation IRB as the interim capital calculation approach for all non-retail exposures in Wholesale.  The Group has adopted the Lloyds TSB relationship model and risk appetite and many of its risk management models and methodologies and, as such, believes that converging on Foundation IRB will facilitate integration work.  This change has resulted in a reduction in risk-weighted assets of approximately £23 billion.

25.
Related party transactions

In January 2009, HM Treasury became a related party of the Company following its subscription for ordinary shares issued under a placing and open offer.  As at 31 December 2010, HM Treasury held a 41 per cent interest (31 December 2009: 43 per cent) in the Company's ordinary share capital and consequently HM Treasury remained a related party of the Company during 2010.

Capital transactions
During 2010 HM Treasury has not subscribed for any of the Company's ordinary or preference capital, with the decline in the percentage of ordinary shares held by HM Treasury reflecting the issuance by the Company of ordinary shares as set out in note 21.

Lending commitments
On 23 March 2010, the Company entered into a deed poll in favour of HM Treasury, the Department for Business, Innovation and Skills and the Departments for Communities and Local Government confirming its lending commitments for the 12 month period commencing 1 March 2010.  The Company agreed subject to, amongst other things, sufficient customer demand, to provide gross new lending to UK businesses of £44,000 million and to adjust the undertakings (but not the level of lending agreed in 2009) given in connection with lending to homeowners for the 12 month period.  This additional lending is expressed to be subject to the Group’s prevailing commercial terms and conditions (including pricing and risk assessment) and, in relation to mortgage lending, the Group’s standard credit and other acceptance criteria.

Credit Guarantee Scheme
HM Treasury launched the Credit Guarantee Scheme in October 2008 as part of a range of measures announced by the UK Government intended to ease the turbulence in the UK banking system.  It charges a commercial fee for the guarantee of new short and medium-term debt issuance.  The fee payable to HM Treasury on guaranteed issues is based on a per annum rate of 50 basis points plus the median five-year Credit Default Swap spread.  At 31 December 2010, the Group had £45,308 million (2009: £49,954 million) of debt issued under the CGS.  During 2010, the Group redeemed £4,987 million of bonds.  The Group's income statement includes fees of £454 million (2009: £498 million) payable to HM Treasury in respect of guaranteed funding.

There were no other material transactions between the Group and HM Treasury during 2010 that were not made in the ordinary course of business or that were unusual in their nature or conditions.

 
26.         Events after the balance sheet date

Lloyds Banking Group has been in discussion with the FSA regarding the application of an interest variation clause in certain Bank of Scotland plc variable rate mortgage contracts where the wording in the offer documents received by certain customers had the potential to cause confusion.  The relevant mortgages were written between 2004 and 2007 by Bank of Scotland plc under the ‘Halifax’ brand.  In February 2011, the Group reached agreement with the FSA in relation to initiating a customer review and contact programme and making goodwill payments to affected customers.  In order to make these goodwill payments, Bank of Scotland plc has applied for a Voluntary Variation of Permission to carry out the customer review and contact programme to bring it within section 404F(7) of FSMA 2000.  The Group has made a provision of £500 million in relation to this programme.


27.         Other information

The financial information included in this news release does not constitute statutory accounts within the meaning of section 434 of the Companies Act 2006.  Statutory accounts for the year ended 31 December 2010 were approved by the directors on 24 February 2011 and will be delivered to the Registrar of Companies following publication on 30 March 2011.  The auditors’ report on these accounts was unqualified and did not include a statement under sections 498(2) (accounting records or returns inadequate or accounts not agreeing with records and returns) or 498(3) (failure to obtain necessary information and explanations) of the Companies Act 2006.

 
SUPPLEMENTARY EUROPEAN EMBEDDED VALUE (EEV) DISCLOSURES

In addition to reporting under IFRS, the Insurance division provides supplementary financial reporting for its Life, Pensions and Investments business on an EEV basis.  For the purpose of EEV reporting, covered business is defined as all life, pensions and investments business written in the Insurance division.  This definition therefore excludes the results of St. James’s Place and the results of the business sold through the Wealth and International division which is not manufactured by the Insurance division.

   
2010 
 
2009 
 
Change 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
             
New business profit
 
381 
 
341 
 
12 
Expected return on existing business
 
347 
 
268 
 
29 
Expected return on shareholders’ net assets
 
184 
 
219 
 
(16)
Profit before tax, before experience variances and assumption changes
 
912 
 
828 
 
10 
Experience variances
 
(15)
 
139 
   
Assumption changes
 
155 
 
(1)
   
Profit  before tax, volatility and other items
 
1,052 
 
966 
 
Volatility
 
236 
 
228 
 
Other items1
 
(231)
 
53 
   
Profit before tax
 
1,057 
 
1,247 
 
(15)
Taxation2
 
(7)
 
(349)
 
98 
Profit after tax
 
1,050 
 
898 
 
17 
             
EEV new business margin
 
3.5% 
 
2.5% 
   

1
Other items represent amounts not considered attributable to the underlying performance of the business.  In 2010 this includes a charge of £70 million following the Group’s decision to cease writing new payment protection insurance business and a charge of £132 million arising from the review of charging between the funds of Clerical Medical prior to the acquisition of HBOS.
2
The figure for taxation in 2010 reflects the actual shareholder tax charged.  This approach differs from 2009 where the tax charge was estimated based on the standard rate of corporation tax.  The prior year figures have not been adjusted to reflect this change as the adjustment is between the volatility and taxation lines.

Total profit before tax, before volatility and other items, increased by £86 million, or 9 per cent, to £1,052 million.  Excluding the impact of experience variances and assumption changes, the profit before tax increased by £84 million or 10 per cent to £912 million.

New business profit has increased by 12 per cent to £381 million, reflecting an improved mix of business and cost reductions through integration across our sales channels. The improved margin reflects the strategic choices made in respect of product and channel propositions as the legacy businesses have been integrated in order to focus on value.

SUPPLEMENTARY EUROPEAN EMBEDDED VALUE (EEV) DISCLOSURES (continued)

Expected return on existing business has increased by 29 per cent to £347 million, reflecting an increase in the value of the opening balance sheet, driven by higher asset values due to higher investment markets in 2009, and an increase in the assumed rate of return. The expected return on shareholders’ net assets has reduced by 16 per cent to £184 million primarily reflecting hedging initiatives.

The net impact of experience variances is not significant, with the reduction from the prior year reflecting the non-recurrence of benefits in 2009.  Assumption changes in 2010 are predominantly driven by benefits in the European business and lower assumed investment management costs in the UK business, partly offset by a charge from aligning future maintenance expense assumptions within the Clerical Medical business to reflect the heritage Lloyds TSB approach.

Composition of EEV balance sheet
     
2010 
2009 
       
£m 
 
£m 
             
Value of in-force business (certainty equivalent)
     
6,315 
 
5,623 
Value of financial options and guarantees
     
(194)
 
(176)
Cost of capital
     
(131)
 
(150)
Non-market risk
     
(137)
 
(132)
Total value of in-force business
     
5,853 
 
5,165 
Shareholders’ net assets
     
3,748 
 
3,840 
Total EEV of covered business
     
9,601 
 
9,005 


Reconciliation of opening EEV balance sheet to closing EEV balance sheet on covered business

 
Shareholders’ 
net assets 
 
Value of 
in-force 
business 
 
Total 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
             
As at 31 December 2008
 
3,948 
 
4,155 
 
8,103 
Total profit (loss) after tax
 
(112)
 
1,010 
 
898 
Other capital movements
 
191 
 
– 
 
191 
Dividends paid to Group companies
 
(187)
 
– 
 
(187)
As at 31 December 2009
 
3,840 
 
5,165 
 
9,005 
Total profit (loss) after tax
 
337 
 
713 
 
1,050 
Other capital movements
 
(4)
 
(25)
 
(29)
Dividends received from Group companies
 
70 
 
– 
 
70 
Dividends paid to Group companies
 
(495)
 
– 
 
(495)
As at 31 December 2010
 
3,748 
 
5,853 
 
9,601 

 
SUPPLEMENTARY EUROPEAN EMBEDDED VALUE (EEV) DISCLOSURES (continued)

Analysis of shareholders’ net assets on an EEV basis on covered business

   
Required 
capital 
 
Free 
surplus 
Shareholders’ 
net assets 
   
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
             
As at 31 December 2008
 
1,401 
 
2,547 
 
3,948 
Total profit (loss) after tax
 
 
(113)
 
(112)
Other capital movements
 
106 
 
85 
 
191 
Dividends paid to Group companies
 
– 
 
(187)
 
(187)
As at 31 December 2009
 
1,508 
 
2,332 
 
3,840 
Total profit (loss) after tax
 
(98)
 
435 
 
337 
Other capital movements
 
(186)
 
182 
 
(4)
Dividends received from Group companies
 
– 
 
70 
 
70 
Dividends paid to Group companies
 
– 
 
(495)
 
(495)
As at 31 December 2010
 
1,224 
 
2,524 
 
3,748 

Economic assumptions
A bottom-up approach is used to determine the economic assumptions for valuing the business in order to determine a market consistent valuation.

The liabilities in respect of the Group’s UK annuity business are matched by a portfolio of fixed interest securities, including a large proportion of corporate bonds.  The value of the in-force business asset for annuity business has been calculated after taking into account an estimate of the market premium for illiquidity in respect of these corporate bond holdings.

The risk-free rate assumed in valuing the non-annuity in-force business is the 15 year government bond yield for the appropriate territory.  The risk-free rate assumed in valuing the in-force asset for the UK annuity business is presented as a single risk-free rate to allow a better comparison to the rate used for other business.  That single risk-free rate has been derived to give the equivalent value to the UK annuity book, had that book been valued using the UK gilt yield curve increased to reflect the illiquidity premium described above.  The risk-free rate used in valuing financial options and guarantees is defined as the spot yield derived from the yield curve for the relevant government bond.  The table below shows the range of resulting yields and other key assumptions.

United Kingdom (Sterling)
 
2010 
 
2009 
   
 
         
Risk-free rate (value of in-force non-annuity business)
 
3.99 
 
4.45 
Risk-free rate (value of in-force annuity business)
 
4.66 
 
5.05 
Risk-free rate (financial options and guarantees)
 
0.63 to 4.50 
 
0.87 to 4.76 
Retail price inflation
 
3.56 
 
3.64 
Expense inflation
 
4.20 
 
4.42 

Non-economic assumptions
Future mortality, morbidity, lapse and paid-up rate assumptions are reviewed each year and are based on an analysis of past experience and on management’s view of future experience.  These assumptions are intended to represent a best estimate of future experience.

 
SUPPLEMENTARY EUROPEAN EMBEDDED VALUE (EEV) DISCLOSURES (continued)

Non-market risk
An allowance for non-market risk is made through the choice of best estimate assumptions based upon experience, which generally will give the mean expected financial outcome for shareholders and hence no further allowance for non-market risk is required.  However, in the case of operational risk, reinsurer default and the with profit funds, these can be asymmetric in the range of potential outcomes for which an explicit allowance is made.

Sensitivity analysis
The table below shows the sensitivity of the EEV and the new business profit before tax to movements in some of the key assumptions.  The impact of a change in the assumption has only been shown in one direction as the impact can be assumed to be reasonably symmetrical.
   
Impact
on EEV 
Impact on 
new business 
profit before 
tax 
2010 EEV/new business profit before tax
 
£m 
 
£m 
         
100 basis points reduction in risk-free rate1
 
240 
 
11 
10 per cent reduction in market values of equity assets2
 
(269)
 
n/a
10 per cent reduction in market values of property assets3
 
(15)
 
n/a
10 per cent reduction in expenses4
 
222 
 
40 
10 per cent reduction in lapses5
 
204 
 
23 
5 per cent reduction in annuitant mortality6
 
(97)
 
(3)
5 per cent reduction in mortality and morbidity (excluding annuitants)7
 
50 
 
100 basis points increase in equity and property returns8
 
Nil 
 
Nil 
25 basis points increase in corporate bond spreads9
 
(115)
 
(5)
10 basis points increase in illiquidity premium10
 
56 
 
n/a

1
In this sensitivity the impact takes into account the change in the value of in-force business, financial options and guarantee costs, statutory reserves and asset values.
2
The reduction in market values is assumed to have no corresponding impact on dividend yields.
3
The reduction in market values is assumed to have no corresponding impact on rental yields.
4
This sensitivity shows the impact of reducing new business, maintenance expenses and investment expenses to 90 per cent of the expected rate.
5
This sensitivity shows the impact of reducing lapse and surrender rates to 90 per cent of the expected rate.
6
This sensitivity shows the impact on the Group’s annuity and deferred annuity business of reducing mortality rates to 95 per cent of the expected rate.
7
This sensitivity shows the impact of reducing mortality and morbidity rates on non-annuity business to 95 per cent of the expected rate.
8
Under a market consistent valuation, changes in assumed equity and property returns have no impact on the EEV.
9
This sensitivity shows the impact of a 25 basis point increase in corporate bond yields and the corresponding reduction in market values.  Government bond yields, the risk-free rate and illiquidity premia are all assumed to be unchanged.
10
This sensitivity shows the impact of a 10 basis point increase in the allowance for illiquidity premium.  It assumes that the overall corporate bond spreads are unchanged and hence market values are unchanged.  Government bond yields and the non-annuity risk-free rate are both assumed to be unchanged.  The increased illiquidity premium increases the annuity risk-free rate.

In sensitivities 4 to 7 and 9 assumptions have been flexed on the basis used to calculate the value of in-force business and the realistic and statutory reserving bases.  A change in risk discount rates is not relevant as the risk discount rate is not an input to a market consistent valuation.

CONTACTS


For further information please contact:

INVESTORS AND ANALYSTS
Kate O’Neill
Managing Director, Investor Relations
020 7356 3520
email: kate.o’neill@ltsb-finance.co.uk

Michael Oliver
Director of Investor Relations
020 7356 2167
email: michael.oliver@ltsb-finance.co.uk

Charles King
Director of Investor Relations
020 7356 3537
email: charles.king@ltsb-finance.co.uk

MEDIA
Brigitte Trafford
Group Communications Director
020 7356 1849
email: brigitte.trafford@lloydsbanking.com

Mark Elliott
Head of Media, City
020 7356 1164
email: mark.elliott2@lloydsbanking.com


Copies of this news release may be obtained from Investor Relations, Lloyds Banking Group plc, 25 Gresham Street, London EC2V 7HN.  The full news release can also be found on the Group’s website – www.lloydsbankinggroup.com.



Registered office: Lloyds Banking Group plc, The Mound, Edinburgh EH1 1YZ
Registered in Scotland no. 95000


 
 

 


 
 
Signatures
 
 
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.
 
                                                                                                                                                LLOYDS BANKING GROUP plc
                                                                                                                                                (Registrant)
 
 
                                                                                                                                                 By: M D Oliver
 
                                                                                                                                                 Name: M D Oliver
 
                                                                                                                                                 Title: Director of Investor Relations
 
 
Date:  25 February 2011